Specification
Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF)
First registration June 2011
Edexcel NVQ/competence-based qualifications
Edexcel, a Pearson company, is the UK’s largest awarding organisation offering vocational and academic qualifications and testing, to employers, training providers, colleges, schools, and other places of learning in the UK, and in over 85 countries worldwide.
Our specialist suite of qualifications include NVQs, Apprenticeships, WorkSkills, Functional Skills, Foundation Learning, as well as our exclusive range of BTECs, from entry level right through to Higher National Diplomas.
References to third party material made in this specification are made in good faith. Edexcel does not endorse, approve or accept responsibility for the content of materials, which may be subject to change, or any opinions expressed therein. (Material may include textbooks, journals, magazines and other publications and websites.)
Authorised by Martin Stretton Prepared by Sarah Bacon
Publications Code N027133
All the material in this publication is copyright © Pearson Education Limited 2011
Contents
Qualification title covered by this specification 1
Key features of the L2 Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF) 2
What is the purpose of this qualification? 2
Who is this qualification for? 2
What are the potential job roles for those working towards this qualification? 2
What progression opportunities are available to learners who achieve this qualification? 3
What is the qualification structure for the Edexcel Level 2 Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF)? 4
How is the qualification graded and assessed? 7
Assessment requirements/strategy 7
Types of evidence (to be read in conjunction with the assessment strategy in Annexe D) 8
Centre recognition and approval 9
Centre recognition 9
Approvals agreement 9
Quality assurance 9
What resources are required? 9
Unit format 10
Units 11
Unit 1: Maintaining health and safety in a laboratory environment 13
Unit 2: Maintaining effective and efficient working relationships in the laboratory 23
Unit 3: Receiving, sorting, transporting and storing laboratory specimens/samples under supervision 31
Unit 4: Communicating laboratory information to authorised personnel under supervision 41
Unit 5: Accessing, registering and inputting patient data in a LIMS under supervision 49
Unit 6: Assisting with the preparation of biopsy specimens for laboratory investigations 59
Unit 7: Assisting with the preparation of microbiological specimens/samples for laboratory investigations 67
Unit 8: Assisting with the processing of liquid clinical specimens using automated laboratory equipment 75
Unit 9: Assisting with the processing of liquid clinical specimens using manual laboratory techniques 85
Unit 10: Assisting with the maintenance of stocks of reagents and consumables for laboratory use 93
Unit 11: Drawing blood samples from patients for laboratory investigations 101
Unit 12: Assisting with the processing of liquid compounds/samples using automated laboratory equipment 109
Unit 13: Assisting with the processing of liquid compounds/samples using manual laboratory techniques 119
Unit 14: Accessing, registering and inputting batch/sample data in a LIMS under supervision 129
Unit 15: Assisting with the preparation of solutions for laboratory use 139
Unit 16: Measuring, weighing and preparing compounds and solutions for laboratory use 147
Unit 17: Assisting with the processing of diagnostic cytology specimens in the laboratory 157
Unit 18: Assisting with the routine maintenance, cleaning, disinfecting and calibration of laboratory equipment 167
Unit 19: Preparing culture media and solutions for laboratory use 175
Unit 20: Following aseptic procedures in the laboratory environment 183
Further information 193
Useful publications 193
How to obtain National Occupational Standards 193
Professional development and training 194
Annexe A: Progression pathways 195
The Edexcel qualification framework for the Science sector 195
Annexe B: Quality assurance 197
Key principles of quality assurance 197
Quality assurance processes 197
Annexe C: Centre certification and registration 199
What are the access arrangements and special considerations for the qualifications in this specification? 199
Annexe D: Assessment requirements/strategy 201
Introduction 201
Assessor Requirements to Demonstrate Effective Assessment Practice 201
Assessor Technical Requirements 201
Verifier Requirements (internal and external) 202
Assessment Environment 204
Access to Assessment 205
Carrying Out Assessment 205
Minimum Performance Evidence Requirements 205
Assessing knowledge and understanding 206
Witness testimony 207
Quality Control of Assessment 207
Annexe E: Additional requirement for qualifications that use the term ‘NVQ’ in a QCF qualification title 209
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
1
Qual
ific
atio
n t
itle
cov
ered
by
this
spec
ific
atio
n
This
spec
ific
atio
n g
ives
you t
he
info
rmation y
ou n
eed t
o o
ffer
the
Edex
cel Le
vel 2 N
VQ
Dip
lom
a in L
abora
tory
Sci
ence
(Q
CF)
:
Qu
alifi
cati
on
tit
le
Qu
alifi
cati
on
N
um
ber
(QN
) R
eg
ula
tio
n
start
date
Edex
cel Le
vel 2 N
VQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
(Q
CF)
600/1
730/2
01/0
6/1
1
This
qual
ific
atio
n h
as
bee
n a
ccre
dited
within
the
Qual
ific
ations
and C
redit F
ram
ework
(Q
CF)
and is
elig
ible
for
public
fundin
g a
s det
erm
ined
by
the
Dep
artm
ent
for
Educa
tion (
DfE
) under
Sec
tion 9
6 o
f th
e Le
arnin
g a
nd S
kills
Act
2000.
The
qual
ific
atio
n t
itle
lis
ted a
bove
fea
ture
s in
the
fundin
g lis
ts p
ublis
hed
annual
ly b
y th
e D
fE a
nd t
he
regula
rly
updat
ed w
ebsi
te.
It w
ill a
lso a
ppea
r on t
he
Learn
ing A
ims
Dat
abas
e (L
AD
), w
her
e re
leva
nt.
You s
hould
use
the
QCF
Qualif
icat
ion N
um
ber
(Q
N),
when
you w
ish t
o s
eek
public
fundin
g f
or
your
lear
ner
s. E
ach
unit w
ithin
a
qual
ific
ation w
ill a
lso h
ave
a u
niq
ue
QC
F re
fere
nce
num
ber
, w
hic
h is
liste
d in t
his
spec
ific
ation.
The
QCF
qual
ific
atio
n t
itle
and u
nit r
efer
ence
num
ber
s w
ill a
ppea
r on t
he
lear
ner
s’ f
inal
cer
tifica
tion d
ocu
men
t. L
earn
ers
nee
d t
o
be
made
aw
are
of th
is w
hen
they
are
rec
ruited
by
the
centr
e an
d r
egis
tere
d w
ith E
dex
cel.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
2
Key features of the L2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF)
This qualification:
is nationally recognised
is based on the Level 2 Laboratory Science National Occupational Standards (NOS). The NOS, assessment requirements/strategy and qualification structure(s) are owned by SEMTA.
The Edexcel Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF) have been approved as components for the Level 2 Laboratory Technicians Apprenticeship framework.
What is the purpose of this qualification?
The Edexcel Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF) provides recognition of the skills and knowledge of individuals who work in a laboratory. It covers health and safety; effective working relationships; dealing with laboratory specimens/samples and communicating information. It contains two Pathways: Clinical Analysis and Compound Analysis.
Who is this qualification for?
This qualification is for all learners aged 18 and above who are capable of reaching the required standards.
Edexcel’s policy is that the qualification should:
be free from any barriers that restrict access and progression
ensure equality of opportunity for all wishing to access the qualification(s).
What are the potential job roles for those working towards this qualification?
Analytical scientist
Biochemist
Biomedical scientist
Biologist
Biotechnologist
Clinical scientist
Microbiologist
Physicist
Research scientist
Education laboratory technician
Laboratory technician
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
3
Medical laboratory assistant
Scientific laboratory technician
What progression opportunities are available to learners who achieve this qualification?
Progression from this qualification can be to other relevant level 2 and/or level 3 qualifications, for example:
Edexcel Level 2 NVQ Certificate in Laboratory and Associated Technical Activities (QCF)
Edexcel Level 3 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory and Associated Technical Activities (QCF).
Edexcel Level 3 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF)
Further information is available in Annexe A.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
4
What is the qualification structure for the Edexcel Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF)?
Individual units can be found in the Units section. The QCF level and credit value are given on the first page of each unit.
Within the Edexcel Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science (QCF) learners may achieve one of the following pathways: Clinical Analysis or Compound Analysis.
For the Clinical Analysis pathway learners must achieve a minimum of 37 credits by completing four common mandatory units, one pathway specific mandatory unit and two optional units, one of which should be taken from Group A – Optional Units.
For the Compound Analysis pathway learners must achieve a minimum of 50 credits by completing four common mandatory units, one pathway specific mandatory unit and two optional units, one of which must be taken from Group A – Optional Units.
Unit Title Credit Level
Common Mandatory units
Unit 1: Maintaining health and safety in a laboratory environment
5 2
Unit 2: Maintaining effective and efficient working relationships in the laboratory
5 2
Unit 3: Receiving, sorting, transporting and storing laboratory specimens/samples under supervision
9 2
Unit 4: Communicating laboratory information to authorised personnel under supervision
6 2
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
5
Unit Title Credit Level
Clinical Analysis Pathway
Must complete the following unit plus two more optional units (one must come from Group A).
Unit 5: Accessing, registering and inputting patient data in a LIMS under supervision
6 2
Group A - Optional units
Unit 6: Assisting with the preparation of biopsy specimens for laboratory investigations
3 2
Unit 7: Assisting with the preparation of microbiological specimens/samples for laboratory investigations
11 2
Unit 8: Assisting with the processing of liquid clinical specimens using automated laboratory equipment
10 2
Unit 9: Assisting with the processing of liquid clinical specimens using manual laboratory techniques
6 2
Unit 17: Assisting with the processing of diagnostic cytology specimens in the laboratory
3 2
Group B - Optional units
Unit 10: Assisting with the maintenance of stocks of reagents and consumables for laboratory use
3 2
Unit 11: Drawing blood samples from patients for laboratory investigations
3 2
Unit 18: Assisting with the routine maintenance, cleaning, disinfecting and calibration of laboratory equipment
6 2
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
6
Unit Title Credit Level
Compound Analysis Pathway
Must complete the following unit plus two more optional units (one must come from Group A).
Unit 16: Measuring, weighing and preparing compounds and solutions for laboratory use
16 3
Group A - Optional Units
Unit 7: Assisting with the preparation of microbiological specimens/samples for laboratory investigations
11 2
Unit 12: Assisting with the processing of liquid compounds/samples using automated laboratory equipment
10 2
Unit 13: Assisting with the processing of liquid compounds/samples using manual laboratory techniques
6 2
Group B - Optional Units
Unit 10: Assisting with the maintenance of stocks of reagents and consumables for laboratory use
3 2
Unit 14: Accessing, registering and inputting batch/sample data in a LIMS under supervision
6 2
Unit 15: Assisting with the preparation of solutions for laboratory use
9 2
Unit 17: Assisting with the processing of diagnostic cytology specimens in the laboratory
3 2
Unit 18: Assisting with the routine maintenance, cleaning, disinfecting and calibration of laboratory equipment
6 2
Unit 19: Preparing culture media and solutions for laboratory use
3 2
Unit 20: Following aseptic procedures in the laboratory environment
9 2
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
7
How is the qualification graded and assessed?
The overall grade for the qualification is a ‘pass’. The learner must achieve all the required units within the specified qualification structure.
To pass a unit the learner must:
achieve all the specified learning outcomes
satisfy all the assessment criteria by providing sufficient and valid evidence for each criterion
show that the evidence is their own.
The qualifications are designed to be assessed:
in the workplace or
in conditions resembling the workplace, as specified in the assessment requirements/strategy for the sector, or
as part of a training programme.
Assessment requirements/strategy
The assessment strategy for this qualification has been included in Annexe D. It has been developed by SEMTA in partnership with employers, training providers, awarding organisations and the regulatory authorities. The assessment strategy includes details on:
criteria for defining realistic working environments
roles and occupational competence of assessors, expert witnesses, internal verifiers and standards verifiers
quality control of assessment
evidence requirements.
Evidence of competence may come from:
current practice where evidence is generated from a current job role
a programme of development where evidence comes from assessment opportunities built into a learning/training programme whether at or away from the workplace
the Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) where a learner can demonstrate that they can meet the assessment criteria within a unit through knowledge, understanding or skills they already possess without undertaking a course of learning. They must submit sufficient, reliable and valid evidence for internal and standards verification purposes. RPL is acceptable for accrediting a unit, several units or a whole qualification
a combination of these.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
8
It is important that the evidence is:
Valid relevant to the standards for which competence is claimed
Authentic produced by the learner
Current sufficiently recent to create confidence that the same skill, understanding or knowledge persist at the time of the claim
Reliable indicates that the learner can consistently perform at this level
Sufficient fully meets the requirements of the standards.
Types of evidence (to be read in conjunction with the assessment strategy in Annexe D)
To successfully achieve a unit the learner must gather evidence which shows that they have met the required standard in the assessment criteria. Evidence can take a variety of different forms including the examples below. Centres should refer to the assessment strategy for information about which of the following are permissible.
direct observation of the learner’s performance by their assessor (O)
outcomes from oral or written questioning (Q&A)
products of the learner’s work (P)
personal statements and/or reflective accounts (RA)
outcomes from simulation, where permitted by the assessment strategy (S)
professional discussion (PD)
assignment, project/case studies (A)
authentic statements/witness testimony (WT)
expert witness testimony (EPW)
evidence of Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL).
The abbreviations may be used for cross-referencing purposes.
Learners can use one piece of evidence to prove their knowledge, skills and understanding across different assessment criteria and/or across different units. It is, therefore, not necessary for learners to have each assessment criterion assessed separately. Learners should be encouraged to reference the assessment criteria to which the evidence relates.
Evidence must be made available to the assessor, internal verifier and Edexcel standards verifier. A range of recording documents is available on the Edexcel website: www.edexcel.com. Alternatively, centres may develop their own.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
9
Centre recognition and approval
Centre recognition
Centres that have not previously offered Edexcel qualifications need to apply for and be granted centre recognition as part of the process for approval to offer individual qualifications. New centres must complete both a centre recognition approval application and a qualification approval application.
Existing centres will be given ‘automatic approval’ for a new qualification if they are already approved for a qualification that is being replaced by the new qualification and the conditions for automatic approval are met. Centres already holding Edexcel approval are able to gain qualification approval for a different level or different sector via Edexcel online.
Approvals agreement
All centres are required to enter into an approvals agreement which is a formal commitment by the head or principal of a centre to meet all the requirements of the specification and any linked codes or regulations. Edexcel will act to protect the integrity of the awarding of qualifications, if centres do not comply with the agreement. This could result in the suspension of certification or withdrawal of approval.
Quality assurance
Detailed information on Edexcel’s quality assurance processes is given in Annexe B.
What resources are required?
This qualification is designed to support learners working in the Laboratory Science sector. Physical resources need to support the delivery of the qualifications and the assessment of the learning outcomes and must be of industry standard. Centres must meet any specific resource requirements outlined in Annexe D: Assessment strategy. Staff assessing the learner must meet the requirements within the overarching assessment strategy for the sector.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
10
Unit format
Each unit in this specification contains the following sections.
Unit title:
Unit reference number:
QCF level:
Credit value:
Guided learning hours:
Unit summary:
Assessment requirements/evidence requirements:
Assessment methodology:
Learning outcomes:
Assessment criteria:
Evidence type:
Portfolio reference:
Date:
The unit title is approved on the QCF and this form of words will appear on the learner’s Notification of Performance (NOP).
This is the unit owner’s reference number for the specified unit.
All units and qualifications within the QCF have a level assigned to them, which represents the level of achievement. There are nine levels of achievement, from Entry level to level 8. The level of the unit has been informed by the QCF level descriptors and, where appropriate, the NOS and/or other sector/professional.
All units have a credit value. The minimum credit value is one, and credits can only be awarded in whole numbers. Learners will be awarded credits when they achieve the unit.
A notional measure of the substance of a qualification. It includes an estimate of the time that might be allocated to direct teaching or instruction, together with other structured learning time, such as directed assignments, assessments on the job or supported individual study and practice. It excludes learner-initiated private study.
This provides a summary of the purpose of the unit.
The assessment/evidence requirements are determined by the SSC. Learners must provide evidence for each of the requirements stated in this section.
Learning outcomes state exactly what a learner should know, understand or be able to do as a result of completing a unit.
The assessment criteria of a unit specify the standard a learner is expected to meet to demonstrate that a learning outcome, or a set of learning outcomes, has been achieved.
Learners must reference the type of evidence they have and where it is available for quality assurance purposes. The learner can enter the relevant key and a reference. Alternatively, the learner and/or centre can devise their own referencing system.
This provides a summary of the assessment methodology to be used for the unit.
The learner should use this box to indicate where the evidence can be obtained eg portfolio page number.
The learner should give the date when the evidence has been provided.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
11
Units
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
12
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
13
Unit 1: Maintaining health and safety in a laboratory environment
Unit reference number: K/601/1703
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 5
Guided learning hours: 35
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to maintain health and safety in the laboratory. The learner is required to observe all legal, statutory and organisational requirements, and the learner must be able to identify any potential hazards and risks to health and safety. The learner must also know what actions to take in case of an emergency and, as well as ensuring their own safety, they must show responsibility towards their colleagues and others. The learner will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with health and safety requirements and organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory work that is undertaken. The learner must be able to recognise the limitations of their own competence with the laboratory work, and ask for appropriate help and advice in when it is needed. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide an understanding of their laboratory work, in order to apply safely the appropriate scientific principles and practices. The learner will be competent in the safe use of the materials, equipment, consumables and instruments used to perform the laboratory investigations, and with the procedures appropriate to their job. The learner’s depth of knowledge will be sufficient to provide a sound basis for safely carrying out the laboratory activities, to a level that will allow the department to meet any agreed targets.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out the laboratory activities for scientific operations and processes. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand their responsibility for taking the necessary safeguards to protect themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
14
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
15
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Mai
nta
in h
ealth a
nd s
afet
y in
a lab
ora
tory
en
viro
nm
ent
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
Acc
ura
tely
ass
ess
hea
lth a
nd s
afet
y in
rel
atio
n t
o
thei
r w
ork
and t
he
labora
tory
1.3
Id
entify
hea
lth a
nd s
afet
y st
andar
d o
per
ating
pro
cedure
s fo
r al
l of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
labora
tory
haz
ards
–
man
ual
han
dlin
g
–
unsa
fe p
ract
ices
–
VD
U &
RSI
polic
ies
–
spill
ages
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
U
se t
he
appro
priat
e per
sonal pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing
and e
quip
men
t fo
r th
e w
ork
1.5
M
ake
safe
any
hea
lth a
nd s
afet
y haz
ard
s, a
nd
report
them
to t
he
appro
priat
e per
son a
s so
on a
s poss
ible
1.6
M
ainta
in t
he
secu
rity
of th
e la
bora
tory
, in
ac
cord
ance
with o
rgan
isat
ional
req
uir
emen
ts
1.7
Ensu
re t
hat
they
mai
nta
in t
hei
r w
ork
are
a t
o a
st
andar
d o
f hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty w
hic
h is
consi
sten
t w
ith loca
l polic
ies
and leg
al r
equirem
ents
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
16
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.8
M
ainta
in a
nd u
se e
quip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith m
anufa
cture
rs’ in
stru
ctio
ns
and
loca
l sa
fety
reg
ula
tions
2
Mai
nta
in h
ealth a
nd s
afet
y in
a lab
ora
tory
en
viro
nm
ent
(continued
)
2.1
D
ispose
of
haz
ardous
mat
eria
ls,
was
te a
nd w
aste
co
nta
iner
s, s
afe
ly a
nd c
orr
ectly
2.2
D
ispose
of,
saf
ely,
sev
en o
f th
e fo
llow
ing,
in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith a
ppro
ved p
roce
dure
s:
–
shar
ps
–
bio
logic
al m
ater
ials
–
met
al
–
chem
ical
(so
lid a
nd liq
uid
)
–
pla
stic
s
–
gla
ss
–
clea
nin
g w
ipes
/tis
sues
–
aero
sol co
nta
iner
s
–
confiden
tial re
cord
s
–
dom
estic
was
te
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
17
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.3
D
ispose
of
was
te in t
hre
e th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of
conta
iner
, in
acc
ord
ance
with a
ppro
ved p
ract
ices
:
–
shar
ps
conta
iner
s
–
colo
ur-
coded
pla
stic
bag
s
–
auto
clav
e bin
s
–
solv
ent
dru
ms
–
pro
priet
ary
conta
iner
s
2.4
Pre
pare
, use
and d
ispose
of dis
infe
ctan
ts,
safe
ly
and c
orr
ectly
2.5
Car
ry o
ut
dec
onta
min
atio
n o
f w
ork
surf
ace
s an
d
floors
eff
ective
ly
2.6
Tak
e th
e appro
priat
e pre
cautions
to p
rote
ct
them
selv
es a
nd o
ther
s during w
ork
ing
2.7
H
andle
saf
ely
thre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing h
azar
dous
subst
ance
s, in a
ccord
ance
with a
ppro
ved
pro
cedure
s:
–
flam
mab
les
–
corr
osi
ve c
hem
icals
–
toxi
c ch
emic
als
–
bio
logic
al m
ater
ials
2.8
Fo
llow
the
corr
ect
pro
cedure
, w
ithout
del
ay,
if
an
emer
gen
cy a
rise
s or
is s
usp
ecte
d
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
18
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.9
Fo
llow
est
ablis
hed
pro
cedure
s fo
r al
l of
the
follo
win
g e
mer
gen
cies
:
–
labora
tory
fire
–
spill
age
of
haz
ardous
subst
ance
s
–
gas
esc
apes
–
oth
er e
mer
gen
cies
(ple
ase
spec
ify)
3
Know
how
to m
ainta
in
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty in a
la
bora
tory
envi
ronm
ent
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
he
lear
ner
is
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
follo
win
g
man
ufa
cture
rs’ in
stru
ctio
ns
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
19
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
spec
ific
safe
ty p
reca
utions
to b
e ta
ken
when
work
ing w
ith labora
tory
equip
men
t an
d
com
pute
r-bas
ed s
yste
ms
(to incl
ude
such
thin
gs
as
safe
ty g
uid
ance
rel
atin
g t
o t
he
use
of
visu
al dis
pla
y unit (
VD
U)
equip
men
t an
d w
ork
sta
tion
envi
ronm
ent
(such
as
lighting,
seat
ing,
posi
tionin
g
of eq
uip
men
t),
and r
epet
itiv
e st
rain
inju
ry (
RSI)
)
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
iden
tity
of hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty
repre
senta
tive
s (s
uch
as
the
Labora
tory
Safe
ty
Off
icer
, Sta
ff H
ealth &
Safe
ty R
epre
senta
tive
s an
d
Firs
t-Aid
ers)
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
loca
tion a
nd c
orr
ect
use
of em
ergen
cy
equip
men
t (s
uch
as
fire
ext
inguis
her
s, incl
udin
g t
he
situ
atio
ns
in w
hic
h d
iffe
rent
types
of
fire
ex
tinguis
her
s ar
e use
d)
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e org
anis
atio
nal
req
uirem
ents
for
mai
nta
inin
g t
he
secu
rity
of th
e w
ork
pla
ce
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e lin
es o
f co
mm
unic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
e le
arn
er’s
ow
n a
uth
ority
an
d t
o w
hom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
3
Exp
lain
why
risk
s in
the
labora
tory
should
be
asse
ssed
, an
d t
he
corr
ect
action t
o b
e ta
ken
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
20
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4
Know
how
to m
ainta
in
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty in a
la
bora
tory
envi
ronm
ent
(continued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
how
to p
reve
nt
infe
ctio
n in lab
ora
tories
4.2
D
escr
ibe
loca
l pro
cedure
s fo
r es
cape
(incl
udin
g
esca
pe
route
s an
d a
ssem
bly
poin
ts)
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
loca
tion o
f fire
ala
rms,
and h
ow
to
oper
ate
them
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
loca
tion o
f sp
illage
kits
, an
d t
he
pro
cedure
s to
follo
w in t
he
even
t of sp
illag
es o
f ch
emic
als
and/o
r bio
logic
al fluid
s
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
contr
ol of
subst
ance
s haz
ardous
to
hea
lth (
CO
SH
H)
regula
tions,
and t
hei
r ap
plic
atio
n in
the
labora
tory
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of haz
ard
s w
hic
h m
ay o
ccur
in
the
labora
tory
set
ting,
and h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
corr
ect
stora
ge
and d
isposa
l pro
cedure
s fo
r haza
rdous
mat
eria
ls (
incl
udin
g:
flam
mab
les,
corr
osi
ve,
har
mfu
l an
d t
oxi
c ch
emic
als)
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
haz
ards
asso
ciat
ed w
ith d
isin
fect
ants
an
d o
ther
chem
ical
s (i
ncl
udin
g t
oxi
city
)
4.9
Exp
lain
the
mea
nin
g o
f th
e te
rms
‘dis
infe
ctio
n’ an
d
‘dec
onta
min
ation’, a
nd t
he
use
of dis
infe
ctants
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e re
aso
ns
for
dis
infe
ctin
g/d
econta
min
atin
g lab
ora
tory
surf
ace
s an
d e
quip
men
t
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
21
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.1
1
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to d
iffe
rentiat
e an
d
segre
gate
cat
egories
of w
ast
e (s
uch
as
usi
ng w
ast
e co
lour-
codin
g)
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e co
rrec
t pro
cedure
s fo
r th
e st
ora
ge,
tr
ansp
ort
and d
isposa
l of
wast
e
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
22
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
23
Unit 2: Maintaining effective and efficient working relationships in the laboratory
Unit reference number: M/601/1895
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 5
Guided learning hours: 25
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to work effectively and efficiently in the laboratory, in accordance with approved procedures and practices. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition for the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment and other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve placing completed work items in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct condition/area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to working efficiently and effectively in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the need to work efficiently and effectively, and will know about the things that they need to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area. The learner will also need to know how to contribute to improvements, deal with problems, maintain effective working relationships, and how to agree and achieve their development objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
24
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
25
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Mai
nta
in e
ffec
tive
and
effici
ent
work
ing
rela
tionsh
ips
in t
he
labora
tory
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ork
safe
ly a
t al
l tim
es,
com
ply
ing w
ith h
ealth a
nd
safe
ty a
nd o
ther
rel
evan
t re
gula
tions
and g
uid
elin
es
1.3
Est
ablis
h a
nd m
ainta
in e
ffec
tive
work
ing
rela
tionsh
ips
1.4
Sust
ain p
osi
tive
work
ing r
elat
ionsh
ips
by
all of
the
follo
win
g:
–
work
ing in t
eam
s
–
support
ing o
ther
s
–
bei
ng c
ooper
ativ
e an
d fle
xible
–
pro
vidin
g c
lear
and a
ccura
te info
rmat
ion
1.5
M
ainta
in e
ffec
tive
work
ing r
elationsh
ips
with t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
colle
agues
in t
hei
r ow
n w
ork
ing g
roup
–
super
viso
rs/m
anager
s
–
more
sen
ior
pro
fess
ional
s/sc
ientist
s
–
colle
agues
outs
ide
thei
r norm
al w
ork
ing g
roup
–
per
sons
exte
rnal
to t
hei
r org
anis
atio
n
1.6
M
eet
org
anis
atio
nal
sta
ndar
ds
for
appea
rance
and
beh
avio
ur
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
26
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Mai
nta
in e
ffec
tive
and
effici
ent
work
ing
rela
tionsh
ips
in t
he
labora
tory
(co
ntinued
)
2.1
D
eal w
ith d
isag
reem
ents
in a
n a
mic
able
and
const
ruct
ive
way
, so
that
good r
elat
ionsh
ips
are
mai
nta
ined
2.2
M
ainta
in c
om
munic
ation w
ith o
ther
s, t
o e
nsu
re t
hat
th
ey a
re k
ept
info
rmed
about
any
work
pla
ns
or
activi
ties
whic
h m
ay a
ffec
t th
em
2.3
Be
awar
e of th
e lim
its
of th
eir
skill
s, a
nd s
eek
assi
stan
ce f
rom
oth
ers
in a
polit
e an
d c
ourt
eous
way
without
causi
ng u
ndue
dis
ruption t
o n
orm
al
work
act
ivitie
s
2.4
Rev
iew
thei
r per
sonal
per
form
ance
and
dev
elopm
ent,
with t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, at
re
gula
r in
terv
als
2.5
Rev
iew
per
sonal
dev
elopm
ent
obje
ctiv
es a
nd
targ
ets,
to incl
ude
one
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
dual
or
multi-
skill
ing
–
trai
nin
g o
n n
ew e
quip
men
t/te
chnolo
gy
–
under
stan
din
g o
f co
mpan
y w
ork
ing p
ract
ices
, pro
cedure
s, p
lans
and p
olic
ies
–
incr
ease
d r
esponsi
bili
ty
–
oth
er s
pec
ific
req
uirem
ents
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
27
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to m
ainta
in
effe
ctiv
e and e
ffic
ient
work
ing r
elat
ionsh
ips
in
the
labora
tory
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
purp
ose
of th
e sp
ecia
lity
of th
e dep
artm
ent
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
em
plo
yed,
and h
ow
it
fits
into
the
oth
er s
pec
ialit
ies
of th
e la
rger
org
anis
atio
n
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
28
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
inte
ract
ions
whic
h t
ake
pla
ce b
etw
een
the
dep
artm
ent
and o
ther
spec
ialit
ies
in t
he
sam
e org
anis
atio
n
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
inte
ract
ions
whic
h t
ake
pla
ce b
etw
een
the
spec
ialit
y in
whic
h t
hey
are
em
plo
yed a
nd
oth
ers
in t
he
sam
e sp
ecia
lity
else
wher
e
3.8
Exp
lain
how
thei
r w
ork
act
ivitie
s affec
t oth
ers
within
the
dep
artm
ent,
org
anis
ation a
nd t
he
com
munity
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
4
Know
how
to m
ainta
in
effe
ctiv
e and e
ffic
ient
work
ing r
elat
ionsh
ips
in
the
labora
tory
(co
ntinued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
acco
unta
bili
ty w
ithin
the
dep
artm
ent
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
gen
eral
funct
ion a
nd p
urp
ose
of al
l th
e re
leva
nt
labora
tories
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
reaso
ns
why
good w
ork
ing
rela
tionsh
ips
are
im
port
ant
4.4
Exp
lain
how
to c
reate
and m
ainta
in g
ood w
ork
ing
rela
tionsh
ips
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
of w
ork
ing e
ffec
tive
ly w
ith
oth
ers
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
29
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
ble
ms
that
can a
ffec
t re
lationsh
ips
in t
he
work
pla
ce
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s fo
r dea
ling w
ith
dis
agre
emen
ts w
ithin
the
work
pla
ce
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
dep
art
men
tal per
form
ance
rev
iew
pro
cess
, and t
hei
r ro
le in t
his
pro
cess
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
reaso
ns
why
effe
ctiv
e co
mm
unic
atio
n
is im
port
ant,
and t
he
met
hods
use
d f
or
com
munic
atin
g e
ffec
tive
ly
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
30
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
31
Unit 3: Receiving, sorting, transporting and storing laboratory specimens/samples under supervision
Unit reference number: T/601/1896
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 9
Guided learning hours: 51
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to receive, sort, transport and store specimens/samples in the laboratory, in accordance with approved procedures and practices. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. The learner will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy and follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve placing specimens/samples in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct condition/area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to receiving, sorting, transporting and storing specimens/samples in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after receiving, sorting, transporting and storing activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
32
achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
33
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Rec
eive
, so
rt,
tran
sport
an
d s
tore
lab
ora
tory
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s under
su
per
visi
on
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
pec
imen
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing
and e
quip
men
t w
hen
oper
ating a
uto
mat
ic
equip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
Confirm
that
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed a
re in t
he
corr
ect
pack
agin
g/c
onta
iner
and a
re lab
elle
d
accu
rate
ly
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
34
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
Tak
e ap
pro
pri
ate
action for
unsu
itab
le
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing
cate
gories
:
–
insu
ffic
ient
volu
me
–
inco
rrec
t han
dlin
g
–
inco
rrec
t co
nta
iner
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
inco
rrec
t st
ora
ge
–
inco
rrec
t sa
mple
1.6
Corr
ectly
unpac
k, lab
el,
pre
pare
and s
ort
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s re
ady
for
anal
ysis
1.7
Pr
epare
spec
imen
s th
at m
ay
require
stora
ge,
tr
ansp
ort
or
furt
her
pro
cess
ing o
n m
ore
than
one
anal
yser
, si
te o
r la
bora
tory
1.8
Pr
oce
ss a
ccom
pan
ying d
ocu
men
tation for
the
spec
imen
/sam
ple
corr
ectly
1.9
Ensu
re t
hat
any
hig
h r
isk
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed a
re d
ealt w
ith a
ccord
ing t
o a
gre
ed loca
l polic
ies
and p
roce
dure
s
2
Rec
eive
, so
rt,
tran
sport
an
d s
tore
lab
ora
tory
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s under
su
per
visi
on (
continued
)
2.1
Id
entify
any
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s th
at
nee
d t
ests
to
be
fast
tra
cked
, an
d n
otify
the
appro
priat
e st
aff
2.2
Pl
ace
rece
ived
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
the
corr
ect
stora
ge
loca
tion(s
), a
nd d
irec
t th
e sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s to
appro
priat
e sp
ecia
litie
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
35
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.3
Pr
epare
and p
ack
age
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fo
r tr
ansp
ort
ation,
acc
ord
ing t
o loca
l an
d n
atio
nal
guid
elin
es
2.4
Arr
ange
tran
sport
atio
n o
f sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s to
oth
er loca
tions,
and a
men
d t
he
labora
tory
in
form
atio
n m
anag
emen
t sy
stem
acc
ord
ingly
2.5
Sto
re s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
the
appro
priate
m
anner
for
the
dep
art
men
t pro
cess
ing t
hem
2.6
Sto
re s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s by
two o
f th
e fo
llow
ing
met
hods:
–
free
zing
–
ambie
nt
–
refr
iger
atin
g
–
incu
bat
ing
2.7
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion a
bout
labora
tory
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s to
auth
orise
d
peo
ple
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d
org
anis
atio
nal
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
36
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.8
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
3
Know
how
to r
ecei
ve,
sort
, tr
ansp
ort
and s
tore
la
bora
tory
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s under
su
per
visi
on
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
are
a in
whic
h y
ou a
re c
arry
ing o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in t
he
loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
atin
g m
anual
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
3.6
Exp
lain
how
the
labora
tory
spec
imen
/sam
ple
co
llect
ion a
nd r
ecep
tion s
yste
m w
ork
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
37
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.7
Exp
lain
how
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s ar
e re
ceiv
ed in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d w
her
e ty
pic
al s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s origin
ate
fro
m
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e pre
-analy
tica
l pro
cedure
s use
d for
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e ra
nge
of haz
ard
label
s use
d o
n
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s, a
nd w
hat
eac
h lab
el m
eans
4
Know
how
to r
ecei
ve,
sort
, tr
ansp
ort
and s
tore
la
bora
tory
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s under
su
per
visi
on (
continued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to e
nsu
re t
hat
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s are
pro
per
ly lab
elle
d a
nd s
tore
d
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
min
imum
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of sp
ecim
en/s
ample
and
spec
imen
/sam
ple
conta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
atio
n
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
38
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s do n
ot
mat
ch u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
ation r
eques
t fo
rms
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in
the
labora
tory
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
spec
imen
/sam
ple
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
spec
imen
/sam
ple
mat
eria
l during s
tora
ge
or
transi
t
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e ri
sks
and h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sp
ecim
en/s
am
ple
, an
d h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
and t
he
tran
sport
ation t
o b
e use
d w
hen
des
pat
chin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
39
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
40
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
41
Unit 4: Communicating laboratory information to authorised personnel under supervision
Unit reference number: A/601/1897
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 6
Guided learning hours: 34
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to communicate laboratory information to authorised personnel, in accordance with approved procedures. The learner will be able to access data from the laboratory information management system (LIMS), from the appropriate files, and to communicate accurately the information to authorised personnel. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to provide laboratory data on specimens/samples to authorised personnel, in accordance with organisational procedures. The learner work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will be sufficient to provide an understanding of the specimen, sample and test requirements for the speciality that they work in. The learner will understand the importance of the Data Protection Act and the need to maintain security and integrity of the laboratory records.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to communicating laboratory information to authorised personnel, in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the need to work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when communicating laboratory information, how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
42
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
43
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Com
munic
ate
labora
tory
in
form
atio
n t
o a
uth
orise
d
per
sonnel
under
su
per
visi
on
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
Exc
han
ge
labora
tory
info
rmation w
ith c
ust
om
ers
effe
ctiv
ely
and e
ffic
iently,
whic
h m
ust
incl
ude
all of
the
follo
win
g t
ypes
:
–
inst
ruct
ions/
dir
ections
–
test
res
ults
–
pro
gre
ss r
eport
1.3
Ensu
re t
he
inte
grity
of th
e la
bora
tory
info
rmat
ion
man
agem
ent
syst
em (
LIM
S)
by
all of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
usi
ng t
he
corr
ect
star
tup/s
hutd
ow
n p
roce
dure
s
–
follo
win
g g
ood p
ract
ice
for
loggin
g o
n/o
ff
–
info
rmat
ion is
pass
ed t
o a
uth
orise
d p
eople
only
1.4
Fo
llow
pro
cedure
s co
rrec
tly
to e
nsu
re t
he
secu
rity
an
d c
onfiden
tial
ity
of la
bora
tory
info
rmat
ion a
nd
reso
lve
all of th
e fo
llow
ing s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
pro
ble
ms:
–
inco
mple
te lab
ellin
g
–
no s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed
–
inco
rrec
t sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
inco
rrec
t han
dlin
g/t
ransp
ort
–
failu
re t
o m
eet
targ
ets
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
44
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Com
munic
ate
labora
tory
in
form
atio
n t
o a
uth
orise
d
per
sonnel
under
su
per
visi
on (
continued
)
2.1
Rec
eive
and r
ecord
the
info
rmation fro
m
cust
om
ers,
in t
he
appro
priate
man
ner
, w
hic
h m
ust
in
clude
sear
chin
g a
nd a
cces
sing d
ata fro
m t
he
LIM
S
for
all of
the
follo
win
g:
–
spec
imen
/sam
ple
info
rmat
ion
–
labora
tory
pro
cess
info
rmat
ion
2.2
Fo
rwar
d m
essa
ges
and info
rmation t
o t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, in
acc
ord
ance
with p
roce
dure
s,
and c
om
munic
ate
to t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing
cust
om
ers:
–
oth
er d
epart
men
t
–
clin
icia
n/s
cien
tist
–
team
mem
ber
s
–
oth
er lab
ora
tories
–
mem
ber
s of th
e public
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.3
Confirm
the
iden
tity
and a
uth
ori
sation o
f ca
llers
bef
ore
you c
om
munic
ate
labora
tory
info
rmat
ion,
in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
45
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.4
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to
com
munic
ate
labora
tory
in
form
atio
n t
o a
uth
orise
d
per
sonnel
under
su
per
visi
on
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
are
a in
whic
h y
ou a
re c
arry
ing o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in t
he
loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
atin
g m
anual
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
dat
a s
ecurity
req
uirem
ents
for
diffe
rent
com
pute
r applic
atio
ns
3.6
Exp
lain
how
to a
cces
s an
d s
tore
dat
a, in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
ating p
roce
dure
s an
d
org
anis
atio
nal
pra
ctic
es
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
46
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.7
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in a
ccura
te
spec
imen
/sam
ple
and d
epart
men
tal re
cord
s
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
spec
ific
safe
ty p
reca
utions
to b
e ta
ken
when
work
ing w
ith c
om
pute
r sy
stem
s (t
o incl
ude
such
thin
gs
as
safe
ty g
uid
ance
rel
atin
g t
o t
he
use
of
visu
al d
ispla
y unit (
VD
U)
equip
men
t an
d
work
stat
ion e
nvi
ronm
ent
(such
as
lighting,
seat
ing,
posi
tionin
g o
f eq
uip
men
t),
repet
itiv
e st
rain
inju
ry
(RSI)
; th
e dan
ger
s of
trai
ling lea
ds
and c
able
s; h
ow
to
spot
faulty
or
dan
ger
ous
elec
tric
al lea
ds,
plu
gs
and c
onnec
tions)
3.9
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in g
ood
house
keep
ing a
rran
gem
ents
(su
ch a
s putt
ing d
isks
, m
anual
s and u
nw
ante
d ite
ms
of eq
uip
men
t in
to
safe
sto
rage;
lea
ving t
he
work
are
a in a
saf
e an
d
tidy
conditio
n)
4
Know
how
to
com
munic
ate
labora
tory
in
form
atio
n t
o a
uth
orise
d
per
sonnel
under
su
per
visi
on (
continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of yo
ur
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
you s
hould
rep
ort
if
you h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
yo
u c
annot
reso
lve
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
47
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
basi
c se
t-up a
nd o
per
atio
n o
f th
e la
bora
tory
rec
ord
s sy
stem
and t
he
per
ipher
al
dev
ices
that
are
use
d (
such
as
mouse
, ke
yboar
d,
VD
U,
pri
nte
r and b
arco
de
reader
)
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
corr
ect
star
tup a
nd s
hutd
ow
n
pro
cedure
s to
be
use
d for
the
com
pute
r sy
stem
4.6
Exp
lain
how
to a
cces
s th
e sp
ecific
com
pute
r La
bora
tory
Info
rmat
ion M
anagem
ent
Sys
tem
(L
IMS)
data
bas
e to
be
use
d,
and t
he
use
of
soft
war
e m
anual
s and r
elat
ed d
ocu
men
ts t
o a
id
effici
ent
oper
atio
n o
f th
e re
leva
nt
labora
tory
re
cord
s sy
stem
4.7
Exp
lain
how
to d
eal w
ith s
yste
m p
roble
ms
(such
as
erro
r m
essa
ges
rec
eive
d,
per
ipher
als
whic
h d
o n
ot
resp
ond a
s ex
pec
ted,
obvi
ous
faults
with t
he
equip
men
t or
connec
ting lea
ds)
4.8
Exp
lain
how
to c
om
munic
ate
effe
ctiv
ely,
and h
ow
to
iden
tify
key
info
rmat
ion w
hen
rec
ord
ing a
nd
forw
ardin
g m
essa
ges
acc
ura
tely
4.9
Exp
lain
how
to r
ecognis
e w
hen
a c
ust
om
er is
angry
an
d/o
r co
nfu
sed,
and t
he
pro
cedure
s fo
r han
dlin
g
the
situ
atio
n
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
48
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
49
Unit 5: Accessing, registering and inputting patient data in a LIMS under supervision
Unit reference number: J/601/1899
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 6
Guided learning hours: 34
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to access, register and input patient data in a Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS). Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to accessing, registering and inputting data into a patient records system in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after work on the patient records system. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
50
achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
51
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Acc
ess,
reg
iste
r an
d input
pat
ient
dat
a in
a L
IMS
under
super
visi
on
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
U
se c
orr
ect
pass
word
s to
acc
ess
the
rele
vant
labora
tory
dat
abase
s, a
nd m
ainta
in t
he
secu
rity
an
d inte
gri
ty o
f in
form
atio
n
1.3
U
se c
orr
ect
sear
ch p
roce
dure
s to
confirm
that
the
pat
ient
dem
ogra
phic
dat
a o
n s
pec
imen
s re
ceiv
ed
are
corr
ect
with e
xist
ing d
ata o
n t
he
labora
tory
re
cord
sys
tem
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
52
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Est
ablis
h d
ata
requirem
ents
for
ten o
f th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
pat
ient
nam
e
–
pat
ient
dat
e of birth
–
pat
ient
gen
der
–
dat
abase
code
–
pat
ient
addre
ss/
loca
tion
–
det
ails
of th
e sp
ecim
en s
ent
and r
ecei
ved
–
clie
nt’s
loca
tion
–
labora
tory
code
–
labora
tory
tes
t re
sults
–
clie
nt
sendin
g t
he
spec
imen
(eg
, doct
or,
vet
, sc
ientist
)
–
pat
ient
spec
ies
(eg,
hum
an,
anim
al,
mar
ine)
–
des
tinat
ion(s
) fo
r re
turn
ing t
he
resu
lts
1.5
Fo
llow
the
corr
ect
pro
toco
ls for
regis
tering n
ew
pat
ients
onto
the
Labora
tory
Info
rmation
Man
agem
ent
Sys
tem
(LI
MS)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
53
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.6
Com
ple
te a
ll of
the
follo
win
g d
epar
tmen
tal
spec
imen
iden
tifica
tion a
ctiv
itie
s:
–
writing a
spec
imen
code
–
addin
g a
bar
code
–
scan
nin
g a
bar
code
with b
arc
ode
read
er
–
chec
king t
he
spec
imen
code
agai
nst
dat
abas
e re
cord
s
1.7
Sel
ect
the
corr
ect
labora
tory
and p
atie
nt
dat
a, a
nd
accu
rate
ly input
pat
ient
and c
linic
al d
etai
ls w
ith t
he
reques
ted t
ests
for
thei
r sp
ecim
en
2
Acc
ess,
reg
iste
r an
d input
pat
ient
dat
a in
a L
IMS
under
super
visi
on
(continued
)
2.1
Acc
ess
and input
pat
ient
dat
a fo
r al
l of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
pat
ient
num
ber
(eg
, N
HS n
um
ber
)
–
hosp
ital
/org
anis
atio
n n
um
ber
–
labora
tory
num
ber
–
labora
tory
tes
t bei
ng d
one
–
det
ails
for
trac
king a
ny
third p
art
y te
stin
g
2.2
Res
olv
e th
e pro
ble
ms
that
aris
e w
hen
the
required
pat
ient
info
rmat
ion a
nd d
ata c
annot
be
found o
r m
atch
ed
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
54
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.3
Res
olv
e tw
o o
f th
e fo
llow
ing d
ata
pro
ble
ms
asso
ciate
d w
ith s
pec
imen
s:
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
poor/
uncl
ear
label
ling
–
dam
aged
/mis
sing label
ling
2.4
Pe
rform
thes
e ta
sks
in a
tim
ely
man
ner
, co
mpat
ible
w
ith t
he
labora
tory
sch
edule
s
2.5
Req
ues
t hel
p f
rom
appro
priat
e peo
ple
when
you a
re
unab
le t
o r
esolv
e pro
ble
ms
with m
ism
atch
ed o
r in
com
ple
te s
pec
imen
det
ails
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
55
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3
Know
how
to a
cces
s,
regis
ter
and input
pat
ient
dat
a in
a L
IMS u
nder
su
per
visi
on
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in t
he
loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
atin
g m
anual
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
dat
a s
ecurity
req
uirem
ents
for
diffe
rent
com
pute
r applic
atio
ns
3.6
Exp
lain
how
to a
cces
s an
d s
tore
dat
a, in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
ating p
roce
dure
s an
d
org
anis
atio
nal
pra
ctic
es
3.7
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in a
ccura
te
pat
ient
and d
epart
men
t re
cord
s fo
r sp
ecim
ens
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
polic
ies
and p
roce
dure
s fo
r th
e ac
cura
te r
egis
trat
ion o
f new
patien
ts o
n t
he
Labora
tory
Info
rmat
ion M
anagem
ent
Sys
tem
(L
IMS)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
56
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
spec
ific
safe
ty p
reca
utions
to b
e ta
ken
when
work
ing w
ith c
om
pute
r sy
stem
s (t
o incl
ude
such
thin
gs
as
safe
ty g
uid
ance
rel
atin
g t
o t
he
use
of
visu
al d
ispla
y unit (
VD
U)
equip
men
t an
d
work
stat
ion e
nvi
ronm
ent
(such
as
lighting,
seat
ing,
posi
tionin
g o
f eq
uip
men
t),
repet
itiv
e st
rain
inju
ry
(RSI)
; th
e dan
ger
s of
trai
ling lea
ds
and c
able
s; h
ow
to
spot
faulty
or
dan
ger
ous
elec
tric
al lea
ds,
plu
gs
and c
onnec
tions)
3.1
0
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in g
ood
house
keep
ing a
rran
gem
ents
(su
ch a
s putt
ing d
isks
, m
anual
s and u
nw
ante
d ite
ms
of eq
uip
men
t in
to
safe
sto
rage;
lea
ving t
he
work
are
a in a
saf
e an
d
tidy
conditio
n)
4
Know
how
to a
cces
s,
regis
ter
and input
pat
ient
dat
a in
a L
IMS u
nder
su
per
visi
on (
continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
basi
c se
t-up a
nd o
per
atio
n o
f th
e la
bora
tory
rec
ord
s sy
stem
and t
he
per
ipher
al
dev
ices
that
are
use
d (
such
as
mouse
, ke
yboar
d,
VD
U,
pri
nte
r and b
arco
de
reader
)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
57
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
corr
ect
star
tup a
nd s
hutd
ow
n
pro
cedure
s to
be
use
d for
the
com
pute
r sy
stem
4.6
Exp
lain
how
to a
cces
s th
e sp
ecific
com
pute
r La
bora
tory
Info
rmat
ion M
anagem
ent
Sys
tem
(L
IMS)
data
bas
e to
be
use
d,
and t
he
use
of
soft
war
e m
anual
s and r
elat
ed d
ocu
men
ts t
o a
id
effici
ent
oper
atio
n o
f th
e re
leva
nt
labora
tory
re
cord
s sy
stem
4.7
Exp
lain
how
to d
eal w
ith s
yste
m p
roble
ms
(such
as
erro
r m
essa
ges
rec
eive
d,
per
ipher
als
whic
h d
o n
ot
resp
ond a
s ex
pec
ted,
obvi
ous
faults
with t
he
equip
men
t or
connec
ting lea
ds)
4.8
Exp
lain
how
to c
om
munic
ate
effe
ctiv
ely,
and h
ow
to
iden
tify
key
info
rmat
ion w
hen
rec
ord
ing a
nd
forw
ardin
g m
essa
ges
acc
ura
tely
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
test
codes
, co
ded
com
men
ts,
reques
tor
and loca
tion c
odes
, and s
pec
imen
co
mm
ent
codes
req
uired
to a
ccura
tely
input
and
reques
t patien
t/la
bora
tory
dat
a, a
ppro
priate
to
thei
r ar
ea o
f w
ork
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
58
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
59
Unit 6: Assisting with the preparation of biopsy specimens for laboratory investigations
Unit reference number: L/601/2018
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 3
Guided learning hours: 17
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with preparation of biopsy specimens for laboratory investigations. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to the preparation of specimen biopsies in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after specimen biopsy preparation activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
60
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
61
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion
of bio
psy
spec
imen
s fo
r la
bora
tory
inve
stig
ations
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
your
work
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
pec
imen
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t as
appro
priat
e fo
r th
e sp
ecim
ens
bei
ng h
andle
d:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
Rec
eive
and lab
el t
he
bio
psy
sam
ple
s, r
emove
d b
y a
com
pet
ent
per
son,
and s
tore
in a
cas
sett
e fo
r fu
rther
pro
cess
ing
1.5
Tak
e appro
priat
e act
ion for
unsu
itab
le s
pec
imen
s,
in a
ll of th
e fo
llow
ing c
ateg
ories
:
–
insu
ffic
ient
volu
me
–
inco
rrec
t han
dlin
g
–
inco
rrec
t co
nta
iner
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
inco
rrec
t st
ora
ge
–
inco
rrec
t sa
mple
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
62
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.6
Tri
m e
xces
s w
ax b
lock
fro
m b
iopsy
sam
ple
s bef
ore
m
icro
met
ry
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion
of bio
psy
spec
imen
s fo
r la
bora
tory
inve
stig
ations
(continued
)
2.1
Rem
ove
cro
ss-s
ections
of w
axed
bio
psy
sam
ple
s,
and p
repar
e pla
tes
for
mic
rosc
opic
anal
ysis
2.2
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g b
iopsy
oper
ations:
–
store
spec
imen
bio
psi
es in c
orr
ectly
label
led
cass
ette
–
pro
cess
spec
imen
bio
psy
cass
ette
s th
rough t
he
par
affin w
ax m
ach
ine
–
rem
ove
bio
psy
sec
tions,
usi
ng m
icro
tom
e m
achin
es
–
separ
ate
spec
imen
bio
psy
sec
tions,
usi
ng w
ater
bat
hs
–
rem
ove
wax
fro
m s
ections,
and p
roce
ss t
hro
ugh
the
stai
nin
g m
ach
ine
–
mount
cove
r sl
ips,
label
sta
ined
bio
psy
pla
tes,
an
d d
espat
ch for
clin
ical
anal
ysis
2.3
Fi
le p
repar
ed s
lides
and b
lock
s fo
r m
icro
scopic
an
alys
is,
in t
he
appro
priat
e lo
cation
2.4
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion a
bout
pre
par
ed s
pec
imen
s to
auth
orise
d p
eople
, in
ac
cord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
63
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.5
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f bio
psy
sp
ecim
ens
for
labora
tory
in
vest
igations
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
Exp
lain
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
Exp
lain
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
labora
tory
spec
imen
rec
eption s
yste
m
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
ms,
an
d t
he
pro
cedure
s use
d f
or
clin
ical
spec
imen
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
64
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.7
Exp
lain
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and
any
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.9
Exp
lain
the
limits
of
thei
r ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
0
Exp
lain
the
min
imum
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f bio
psy
sp
ecim
ens
for
labora
tory
in
vest
igations
(continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
loca
tion for
each
cat
egory
of
spec
imen
th
at c
an b
e re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of sp
ecim
en a
nd s
pec
imen
co
nta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
ation
4.3
Exp
lain
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling
with r
outine
and u
rgen
t sp
ecim
ens
4.4
Exp
lain
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
sp
ecim
ens
do n
ot
matc
h u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
atio
n
reques
t fo
rms
4.5
Exp
lain
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a b
roke
n
or
leak
ing s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in t
he
labora
tory
4.6
Exp
lain
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
spec
imen
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
65
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling s
pec
imen
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
, an
d
the
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring inve
stig
atio
ns
4.8
Exp
lain
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y af
fect
the
inte
grity
of th
e sp
ecim
en m
ate
rial
or
sam
ple
during
stora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.9
Exp
lain
the
risk
s an
d h
azar
ds
ass
oci
ated
with t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sa
mple
and h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g s
pec
imen
s
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
66
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
67
Unit 7: Assisting with the preparation of microbiological specimens/samples for laboratory investigations
Unit reference number: R/601/2019
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 11
Guided learning hours: 63
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the preparation of microbiological specimens/samples for laboratory investigations in the laboratory. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve placing microbiological specimens/samples in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to preparing microbiological specimens/samples in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after specimen/sample preparation activities. The learner
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
68
will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
69
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion
of m
icro
bio
logic
al
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fo
r la
bora
tory
inve
stig
ations
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
1.3
U
se f
our
of
the
follo
win
g t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t fo
r th
e sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s bei
ng h
andle
d:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
exhau
st p
rote
ctiv
e ca
bin
et
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
Ensu
re t
hat
any
hig
h r
isk
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed a
re h
andle
d in a
ccord
ance
agre
ed loca
l polic
ies
and p
roce
dure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
70
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
Tak
e ap
pro
pri
ate
action for
unsu
itab
le
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing
cate
gories
:
–
insu
ffic
ient
volu
me
–
inco
rrec
t han
dlin
g
–
inco
rrec
t co
nta
iner
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
inco
rrec
t st
ora
ge
–
inco
rrec
t sa
mple
1.6
Pr
epare
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
corr
ectly
label
led
Petr
i dis
hes
and b
ott
les
with b
iolo
gic
al gro
wth
m
ediu
m
1.7
Pre
pare
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fo
r bio
logic
al g
row
th,
usi
ng e
ight
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
bunse
n b
urn
er
–
wire
loop/d
isposa
ble
loop
–
auto
mat
ed p
ipet
tes
–
man
ual
pip
ette
s
–
Petr
i dis
hes
with b
iolo
gic
al gro
wth
med
ium
–
bott
les
with b
iolo
gic
al gro
wth
med
ium
–
incu
bat
ors
–
free
zers
–
refr
iger
atio
n
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
71
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion
of m
icro
bio
logic
al
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fo
r la
bora
tory
inve
stig
ations
(continued
)
2.1
Corr
ectly
label
Pet
ri d
ishes
and b
ott
les,
and
mai
nta
in a
ccura
te lab
ora
tory
rec
ord
s
2.2
Tra
nsp
ort
Pet
ri d
ishes
and b
ott
les
safe
ly a
round t
he
labora
tory
, an
d s
tore
them
appro
priat
ely
2.3
Sto
re p
repar
ed s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
the
corr
ect
incu
bat
ors
, to
the
appro
ved m
anner
for
bio
logic
al
gro
wth
2.4
Rem
ove
Pet
ri d
ishes
and b
ott
les
from
incu
bat
ors
, re
ady
for
the
iden
tifica
tion o
f co
lonis
ed
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s by
com
pet
ent
staf
f
2.5
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion o
n
labora
tory
act
ivitie
s to
auth
orise
d p
eople
, in
ac
cord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of pre
par
atio
n w
ork
, an
d
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
72
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f m
icro
bio
logic
al
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fo
r la
bora
tory
inve
stig
ations
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.9
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to e
nsu
re t
hat
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s are
pro
per
ly lab
elle
d a
nd s
tore
d
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
73
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e m
inim
um
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e ty
pes
of sp
ecim
en/s
ample
and
spec
imen
/sam
ple
conta
iner
use
d in t
hei
r sp
ecia
lity,
an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
atio
n
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f m
icro
bio
logic
al
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fo
r la
bora
tory
inve
stig
ations
(continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of in
cubat
or
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
for
bio
logic
al g
row
th
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
types
and r
ange
of gro
wth
med
ia u
sed
for
the
analy
sis
of m
icro
bio
logic
al c
olo
nie
s
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s do n
ot
mat
ch u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
ation r
eques
t fo
rms
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in
the
labora
tory
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
spec
imen
/sam
ple
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s (a
liquots
) ta
ken d
uring
pre
par
ation
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
74
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
spec
imen
/ sa
mple
during
stora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
risk
s an
d h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s, a
nd h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
75
Unit 8: Assisting with the processing of liquid clinical specimens using automated laboratory equipment
Unit reference number: J/601/2020
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 10
Guided learning hours: 57
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to prove the competences required to assist with the processing of liquid clinical specimens for laboratory investigation, using automated equipment. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. The learner will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting liquid clinical specimens in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials or equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, material or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to processing liquid clinical specimens in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after specimen/sample processing activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
76
targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
77
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
clin
ical
spec
imen
s usi
ng a
uto
mat
ed
labora
tory
equip
men
t
1.1
Ensu
re t
hei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
with
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t w
hen
han
dlin
g c
linic
al s
pec
imen
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t w
hen
oper
atin
g a
uto
mat
ic
equip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
Confirm
that
the
labora
tory
equip
men
t is
set
up
and r
eady
for
oper
ation
1.5
Pr
oce
ss c
linic
al s
pec
imen
s, u
sing o
ne
of
the
follo
win
g:
–
anal
yser
s usi
ng d
irec
t sa
mplin
g
–
anal
yser
s usi
ng p
repar
ed s
ample
s
1.6
Fo
llow
the
def
ined
pro
cedure
s fo
r st
arting a
nd
runnin
g t
he
labora
tory
equip
men
t
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
78
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.7
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g p
roce
ssin
g o
per
atio
ns:
–
tran
sport
liq
uid
clin
ical
spec
imen
s ar
ound t
he
labora
tory
and s
tore
them
appro
priat
ely
–
seek
any
nec
essa
ry inst
ruct
ion/t
rain
ing o
n t
he
oper
atio
n o
f th
e eq
uip
men
t, w
hen
appro
priat
e
–
chec
k th
at e
quip
men
t guar
ds
are
in p
lace
and
are
corr
ectly
adju
sted
–
ensu
re t
hat
liquid
clin
ical
spec
imen
s have
bee
n
load
ed c
orr
ectly
and a
re h
eld s
ecure
ly
–
chec
k th
at t
he
oper
ating p
rogra
m for
the
anal
yser
/equip
men
t is
at
the
corr
ect
star
t poin
t,
and t
hat
the
spec
imen
s are
at
the
corr
ect
loca
tion in t
he
anal
yser
/equip
men
t
–
follo
w t
he
def
ined
oper
atin
g p
roce
dure
s fo
r th
e an
alys
er/e
quip
men
t, a
nd a
pply
saf
e w
ork
ing
pra
ctic
es a
nd p
roce
dure
s at
all
tim
es
–
confirm
with a
qual
ifie
d p
rofe
ssio
nal
that
equip
men
t se
ttin
gs
are
adju
sted
, as
and w
hen
re
quired
, to
mai
nta
in t
he
required
acc
ura
cy
–
confirm
with a
qual
ifie
d p
rofe
ssio
nal
that
the
anal
yses
pro
duce
d m
eet
the
required
sp
ecific
atio
n for
qualit
y an
d a
ccura
cy
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
79
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
clin
ical
spec
imen
s usi
ng a
uto
mat
ed
labora
tory
equip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
2.1
Lo
ad a
nd u
nlo
ad s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s fr
om
la
bora
tory
equip
men
t in
acc
ord
ance
with
pro
cedure
s an
d a
naly
ser/
equip
men
t sp
ecific
ations
2.2
D
eal pro
mptly
and e
ffec
tive
ly w
ith e
rror
mes
sages
or
equip
men
t fa
ults
that
are
within
thei
r co
ntr
ol an
d
report
those
that
can
not
be
solv
ed
2.3
M
onitor
the
equip
men
t pro
cess
and e
nsu
re t
hat
the
outp
ut
readin
gs
are
to t
he
required
spec
ific
atio
n
2.4
Shut
dow
n t
he
equip
men
t to
a s
afe
conditio
n o
n
concl
usi
on o
f th
e act
ivitie
s
2.5
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion lab
ora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
to a
uth
orise
d p
eople
in a
ccord
ance
with
dep
artm
enta
l an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of pre
par
atio
n w
ork
, an
d
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
80
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
labora
tory
spec
imen
rec
eption s
yste
m
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
m,
and t
he
pro
cedure
s use
d f
or
clin
ical
spec
imen
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
81
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
inim
um
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e ty
pes
of sp
ecim
en a
nd s
pec
imen
co
nta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
ation
3.1
3
Exp
lain
how
to a
sses
s if a
clin
ical
spec
imen
is
suitab
le f
or
anal
ysis
3.1
4
Exp
lain
how
to s
tart
and s
hut
dow
n t
he
anal
yser
/equip
men
t, incl
udin
g w
hat
to d
o in a
n
emer
gen
cy
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
why
is it
import
ant
that
pre
-run c
hec
ks a
re
carr
ied o
ut,
and t
hat
they
iden
tify
the
stat
us
of th
e an
alys
er/e
quip
men
t
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to load
clin
ical
spec
imen
s fo
r th
e an
alys
er/e
quip
men
t, a
nd h
ow
to initia
te s
ample
an
alys
is
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
appro
priat
e act
ion t
o t
ake
when
sp
ecim
en s
amplin
g o
r eq
uip
men
t er
rors
occ
ur
4.4
Exp
lain
how
to u
nlo
ad c
linic
al s
pec
imen
s fr
om
the
anal
yser
/equip
men
t, a
nd h
ow
to s
tore
them
aft
er
anal
ysis
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
82
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
clin
ical
spec
imen
s do n
ot
matc
h u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
atio
n
reques
t fo
rms
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in
the
labora
tory
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
spec
imen
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling c
linic
al sp
ecim
ens
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring
inve
stig
ations
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e fa
ctors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
spec
imen
or
sam
ple
during
stora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e ri
sks
and h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sa
mple
s, a
nd h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g c
linic
al s
pec
imen
s
4.1
3
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
and t
he
tran
sport
ation t
o b
e use
d w
hen
des
pat
chin
g c
linic
al
spec
imen
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
83
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
84
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
85
Unit 9: Assisting with the processing of liquid clinical specimens using manual laboratory techniques
Unit reference number: L/601/2021
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 6
Guided learning hours: 40
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the processing of liquid clinical specimens for laboratory investigations, using manual techniques. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. The learner will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting liquid clinical specimens in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials or equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to processing liquid clinical specimens manually in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after specimen/sample processing activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
86
and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
87
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
clin
ical
spec
imen
s usi
ng m
anual
labora
tory
te
chniq
ues
1.1
Ensu
re t
hei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
with
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g c
linic
al s
pec
imen
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t, a
s ap
pro
priat
e fo
r th
e cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s bei
ng h
andle
d:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
O
bta
in t
he
appro
priate
equip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
for
the
man
ual te
sts
required
1.5
U
se t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing m
ater
ials
for
the
man
ual
te
sts:
–
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
–
reag
ents
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.6
Conduct
man
ual
labora
tory
tes
ts o
n liq
uid
clin
ical
sp
ecim
ens,
usi
ng t
he
corr
ect
pro
cedure
s and
tech
niq
ues
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
88
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
clin
ical
spec
imen
s usi
ng m
anual
labora
tory
te
chniq
ues
(co
ntinued
)
2.1
Conduct
thre
e of
the
follo
win
g m
anual
lab
ora
tory
te
sts:
–
urine
dip
stick
s (d
ip s
tix)
–
mak
ing b
lood film
s an
d s
tain
ing s
lides
–
ELI
SA t
esting
–
urine
volu
me/
pH
mea
sure
men
t
–
blo
od g
luco
se
–
elec
trophore
sis
gel
s
–
urine
pre
gnan
cy t
est
–
pre
par
ation o
f im
muno-f
luore
scen
ce s
lides
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.2
Rec
ord
the
resu
lts
of
man
ual
tes
ts,
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
2.3
D
ispose
of
was
te ite
ms
from
manual
labora
tory
te
sts,
in a
ccord
ance
with s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g
pro
cedure
s
2.4
Ret
urn
equip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
that
can b
e use
d
for
test
ing t
o t
he
corr
ect
stora
ge
loca
tion
2.5
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion lab
ora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
to a
uth
orise
d p
eople
in a
ccord
ance
with
dep
artm
enta
l an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
89
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of pre
par
atio
n w
ork
, an
d
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s usi
ng
man
ual
lab
ora
tory
te
chniq
ues
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
labora
tory
spec
imen
rec
eption s
yste
m
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
90
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
m,
and t
he
pro
cedure
s use
d f
or
clin
ical
spec
imen
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
inim
um
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
/sam
ple
s re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e lo
cation for
each
cat
egory
of
spec
imen
/sam
ple
s th
at c
an b
e re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
3
Des
crib
e th
e ty
pes
of sp
ecim
en/s
ample
and
spec
imen
/sam
ple
conta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
atio
n
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s usi
ng
man
ual
lab
ora
tory
te
chniq
ues
(co
ntinued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
how
to a
sses
s if a
clin
ical
spec
imen
is
suitab
le f
or
anal
ysis
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to u
se a
nd t
ake
a r
eadin
g fro
m m
anual
test
kits
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
91
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.3
Exp
lain
how
to t
ake
blo
od p
rick
sam
ple
s fo
r a
han
dhel
d t
este
r, t
o m
easu
re g
luco
se lev
els
and
take
rea
din
gs
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t cl
inic
al s
pec
imen
s
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
clin
ical
spec
imen
s do n
ot
matc
h u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
atio
n
reques
t fo
rms
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in
the
labora
tory
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
spec
imen
/sam
ple
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling c
linic
al sp
ecim
ens
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring
inve
stig
ations
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
spec
imen
or
sam
ple
during
stora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e ri
sks
and h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sa
mple
s, a
nd h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g c
linic
al s
pec
imen
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
92
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
and t
he
tran
sport
ation t
o b
e use
d w
hen
des
pat
chin
g c
linic
al
spec
imen
s
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
93
Unit 10: Assisting with the maintenance of stocks of reagents and consumables for laboratory use
Unit reference number: R/601/2022
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 3
Guided learning hours: 17
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the maintenance of stocks of reagents and consumables for laboratory use. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials or equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to the maintenance of stocks of reagents and consumables used in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after work on stock maintenance. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
94
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
95
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
mai
nte
nance
of
stock
s of
reag
ents
and c
onsu
mab
les
for
labora
tory
use
1.1
Ensu
re t
hei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
with
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
tock
ite
ms
1.3
Count
stock
s an
d c
onfirm
that
they
are
with t
he
max
imum
/min
imum
lev
els
required
for
the
labora
tory
act
ivitie
s
1.4
Chec
k st
ock
lev
els
for
both
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
reag
ents
–
consu
mab
les
1.5
Chec
k th
e pac
kagin
g info
rmat
ion o
n indiv
idual
st
ock
ite
ms,
and c
onfirm
that
cri
tica
l det
ails
are
w
ithin
acc
epta
ble
lim
its
1.6
Chec
k pac
kagin
g for
all of
the
follo
win
g
info
rmat
ion:
–
bat
ch n
um
ber
s
–
expiry
dat
es
–
del
iver
y date
s
–
haz
ard lab
els
–
volu
mes
–
wei
ghts
1.7
Id
entify
, re
cord
and c
om
munic
ate
requirem
ents
to
reple
nis
h s
tock
s at
spec
ifie
d r
e-ord
er lev
els
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
96
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.8
Chec
k new
sto
cks
rece
ived
agai
nst
del
iver
y note
s,
label
and s
tore
ite
ms
in t
he
corr
ect
envi
ronm
ent
and loca
tion
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
mai
nte
nance
of
stock
s of
reag
ents
and c
onsu
mab
les
for
labora
tory
use
(c
ontinued
)
2.1
Chec
k st
ock
ite
ms
hel
d in f
our
of
the
follo
win
g
stora
ge
envi
ronm
ents
:
–
ambie
nt
tem
per
ature
loca
tions
–
refr
iger
ators
/fre
ezer
s
–
zero
or
low
lig
ht
loca
tions
–
haz
ardous
chem
ical
loca
tions
–
auto
mat
ic e
quip
men
t
–
consu
mab
le ite
m loca
tions
2.2
Corr
ectly
han
dle
and t
ransp
ort
sto
ck ite
ms,
usi
ng
the
appro
priat
e m
ethods
and t
echniq
ues
2.3
H
andle
and t
ransp
ort
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of
mat
eria
l:
–
solid
s
–
liquid
s
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.4
D
ispose
, in
the
appro
priat
e m
anner
and loca
tions,
of
stock
or
item
s th
at a
re d
amaged
or
outs
ide
acce
pta
ble
lim
its
for
labora
tory
use
2.5
Acc
ess
and u
pdat
e re
cord
s fo
r st
ock
lev
els
in t
he
labora
tory
info
rmat
ion m
anag
emen
t sy
stem
(LI
MS)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
97
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.6
Acc
ess
and u
pdat
e in
form
atio
n o
n t
he
LIM
S for
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
booki
ng ite
ms
out
from
sto
ck
–
booki
ng ite
ms
into
sto
ck
–
stock
chec
k le
vels
2.7
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion t
o
auth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal
and o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
2.8
Rec
ord
det
ails
of st
ock
contr
ol, a
nd c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priate
peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
main
tenan
ce o
f st
ock
s of re
agen
ts a
nd
consu
mab
les
for
labora
tory
use
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
98
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
reag
ents
and c
onsu
mab
les
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.9
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in a
ccura
te
labora
tory
rec
ord
s fo
r st
ock
s of
reag
ents
and
consu
mab
les
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
main
tenan
ce o
f st
ock
s of re
agen
ts a
nd
consu
mab
les
for
labora
tory
use
(co
ntinued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
mea
nin
g o
f th
e va
rious
nota
tions
whic
h a
re u
sed in t
he
labora
tory
for
wei
ghts
and
volu
mes
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
types
and r
ange
of re
agen
ts a
nd
consu
mab
les
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d h
ow
they
have
to b
e ch
ecke
d
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
99
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.3
Exp
lain
how
to c
hec
k th
e pac
kagin
g info
rmat
ion o
n
reag
ents
and c
onsu
mab
les
(such
as
bat
ch n
um
ber
s an
d e
xpiry
dat
es)
4.4
Exp
lain
how
and w
hy
it is
import
ant
to iden
tify
m
ater
ials
that
should
not
be
store
d t
oget
her
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
range
of st
ora
ge
envi
ronm
ents
use
d t
o
store
rea
gen
ts a
nd c
onsu
mab
les
for
labora
tory
use
4.6
Exp
lain
how
to lab
el n
ew s
tock
ite
ms
corr
ectly,
and
how
to r
ecord
the
info
rmat
ion in t
he
labora
tory
in
form
atio
n m
anag
emen
t sy
stem
4.7
Exp
lain
wher
e an
d h
ow
sto
ck ite
ms
should
be
store
d s
o t
hey
rem
ain s
uitab
le f
or
labora
tory
use
4.8
Exp
lain
how
to m
onitor
and c
ontr
ol st
ock
lev
els
for
labora
tory
rea
gen
ts a
nd c
onsu
mab
les
4.9
Exp
lain
how
to d
ispose
of w
ast
e or
dam
aged
sto
ck
item
s, in a
ccord
ance
with s
tandar
ds
oper
ating
pro
cedure
s
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
100
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
101
Unit 11: Drawing blood samples from patients for laboratory investigations
Unit reference number: Y/601/2023
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 3
Guided learning hours: 17
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to draw blood specimens from patients for laboratory investigations. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to the drawing of blood specimens in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after blood specimen taking. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
102
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
103
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Dra
w b
lood s
am
ple
s fr
om
pat
ients
for
labora
tory
in
vest
igations
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
and a
pply
sta
ndar
d p
reca
utions
for
infe
ctio
n c
ontr
ol, t
oget
her
with a
ny
oth
er
rele
vant
hea
lth a
nd s
afet
y m
easu
res
1.3
U
se t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing
and e
quip
men
t w
hen
ext
ract
ing b
lood:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
104
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g b
lood e
xtra
ctio
n
oper
atio
ns:
–
wel
com
e and r
eass
ure
the
pat
ient,
prior
to b
lood
extr
act
ion
–
expla
in a
nd c
hec
k th
e pat
ient’s
under
stan
din
g o
f th
e pro
cedure
, es
pec
ially
if under
taki
ng a
pro
longed
pro
cedure
such
as
a G
luco
se
Tole
rance
Tes
t
–
pla
ce t
he
pat
ient
in t
he
bes
t posi
tion f
or
blo
od
extr
act
ion
–
inse
rt t
he
nee
dle
safe
ly a
nd c
orr
ectly
in t
he
med
ian c
ubital
vei
n o
n t
he
pat
ient
–
obta
in t
he
blo
od in t
he
corr
ect
volu
me,
usi
ng
colle
ctio
n/v
acuum
tubes
–
obta
in t
he
blo
od in t
he
corr
ect
ord
er o
f tu
bes
w
hen
tak
ing m
ultip
le s
ample
s
–
safe
ly r
emove
the
nee
dle
, ap
ply
pre
ssure
with
cott
on b
all,
ensu
re t
hat
ble
edin
g fro
m t
he
arm
has
sto
pped
, an
d a
pply
a t
empora
ry d
ress
ing
–
dis
pose
of
nee
dle
safe
ly,
in a
ccord
ance
with
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
–
iden
tify
and d
eal w
ith a
ny
adve
rse
patien
t re
action t
o t
he
blo
od e
xtra
ctio
n p
roce
ss
–
tran
sport
blo
od s
pec
imen
s ar
ound t
he
labora
tory
an
d s
tore
them
appro
priat
ely
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
105
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
Po
sitive
ly a
nd c
orr
ectly
confirm
the
per
son’s
id
entity
, and o
bta
in/c
onfirm
thei
r co
nse
nt,
prior
to
blo
od e
xtra
ctio
n
1.6
Sel
ect
the
appro
priat
e blo
od t
ubes
for
the
test
s re
ques
ted
1.7
Pr
epare
the
corr
ect
equip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
re
quired
to e
xtra
ct t
he
blo
od s
pec
imen
fro
m t
he
pat
ient
2
Dra
w b
lood s
am
ple
s fr
om
pat
ients
for
labora
tory
in
vest
igations
(continued
)
2.1
D
raw
blo
od s
pec
imen
s fr
om
patien
ts,
usi
ng t
he
corr
ect
pro
cedure
s an
d t
echniq
ues
2.2
D
eal w
ith a
ny
adve
rse
pat
ient
reac
tions
follo
win
g
the
blo
od d
raw
ing p
roce
ss,
in a
ccord
ance
with
esta
blis
hed
pro
cedure
s an
d p
ract
ices
2.3
La
bel
and p
acka
ge
blo
od s
pec
imen
s, in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
2.4
D
ispose
of
was
te ite
ms
from
the
blo
od s
pec
imen
ex
tract
ion p
roce
ss,
in a
ccord
ance
with s
tandar
d
oper
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
2.5
Tra
nsp
ort
and s
tore
the
blo
od s
pec
imen
in t
he
corr
ect
loca
tion f
or
labora
tory
pro
cess
ing
2.6
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion t
o
auth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal
and o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
106
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.7
Rec
ord
det
ails
of blo
od t
aki
ng,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priate
peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to d
raw
blo
od
sam
ple
s fr
om
patien
ts for
labora
tory
inve
stig
ations
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
107
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
seek
ing p
osi
tive
co
nfirm
atio
n o
f ea
ch p
atie
nt’s
iden
tity
and c
onse
nt,
an
d e
ffec
tive
ways
of doin
g t
his
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
the
colle
ctio
n o
f blo
od fro
m p
atie
nts
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e as
pec
ts o
f blo
od t
akin
g,
and t
he
requirem
ents
for
diffe
rent
sam
ple
tubes
and
label
ling p
roto
cols
4
Know
how
to d
raw
blo
od
sam
ple
s fr
om
patien
ts for
labora
tory
inve
stig
ations
(continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
anat
om
ical
and p
hys
iolo
gic
al lo
cations
use
d o
n t
he
pat
ient’s
body
for
the
extr
action o
f blo
od
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to r
eass
ure
pat
ients
when
taki
ng
venous
blo
od,
and h
ow
to s
eek
assi
stan
ce w
hen
nee
ded
4.3
Exp
lain
how
to e
xtra
ct b
lood fro
m p
atien
ts,
usi
ng
vacu
um
tubes
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty p
reca
utions
to b
e ta
ken w
hen
han
dlin
g b
lood
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
108
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed in a
n
emer
gen
cy s
ituat
ion (
such
as
when
blo
od f
low
ca
nnot
be
stopped
or
when
a p
atien
t has
fai
nte
d)
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t sp
ecim
ens
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in
the
labora
tory
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
label
ling a
nd n
um
ber
ing
blo
od s
am
ple
s co
rrec
tly
for
inve
stig
ation b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of a b
lood s
pec
imen
during s
tora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
tran
sport
ing b
lood s
pec
imen
s
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
109
Unit 12: Assisting with the processing of liquid compounds/samples using automated laboratory equipment
Unit reference number: D/601/2024
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 10
Guided learning hours: 57
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the processing of liquid compounds/samples for laboratory investigation, using automated equipment. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting liquid compounds/samples in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to processing liquid compounds/samples in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after liquid compound/sample processing activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
110
objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
111
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t w
hen
oper
atin
g t
he
auto
mat
ic e
quip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
112
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g p
roce
ssin
g o
per
atio
ns:
–
tran
sport
liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s ar
ound t
he
labora
tory
, an
d s
tore
them
appro
priat
ely
–
confirm
that
the
pro
cess
ing e
quip
men
t is
rea
dy
for
the
analy
sis
activi
ty
–
wher
e ap
pro
priate
, se
ek a
ny
nec
essa
ry
inst
ruct
ion/t
rain
ing o
n t
he
oper
atio
n o
f th
e eq
uip
men
t
–
chec
k th
at a
ny
equip
men
t guar
ds
are
in p
lace
an
d a
re c
orr
ectly
adju
sted
–
ensu
re t
hat
liquid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s hav
e bee
n load
ed c
orr
ectly
and a
re h
eld s
ecure
ly
–
chec
k th
at t
he
oper
ating p
rogra
m for
the
anal
yser
/equip
men
t is
at
the
corr
ect
star
t poin
t,
and t
hat
the
liquid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s are
at
the
corr
ect
loca
tion in t
he
anal
yser
/equip
men
t
–
follo
w t
he
def
ined
oper
atin
g p
roce
dure
s fo
r th
e an
alys
er/e
quip
men
t, a
nd a
pply
saf
e w
ork
ing
pra
ctic
es a
nd p
roce
dure
s at
all
tim
es
–
ensu
re t
hat
anal
yser
/equip
men
t se
ttin
gs
are
adju
sted
as
and w
hen
req
uired
(ei
ther
by
them
selv
es o
r th
e co
mpet
ent
per
son)
to
mai
nta
in t
he
required
acc
ura
cy
–
ensu
re t
hat
the
anal
yses
pro
duce
d m
eet
the
spec
ific
atio
n for
the
required
qual
ity
and
accu
racy
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
113
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
Lo
ad a
nd u
nlo
ad liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s fr
om
la
bora
tory
equip
men
t, in a
ccord
ance
with
pro
cedure
s an
d a
naly
ser/
equip
men
t sp
ecific
ations
1.6
Fo
llow
the
def
ined
pro
cedure
s fo
r st
arting a
nd
runnin
g t
he
labora
tory
equip
men
t
1.7
Lo
ad r
efer
ence
sta
ndar
ds
and p
erfo
rm c
alib
ration
chec
ks o
n lab
ora
tory
equip
men
t, in a
ccord
ance
with
pro
cedure
s
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
2.1
Confirm
that
the
labora
tory
equip
men
t is
set
up
and r
eady
for
oper
ation
2.2
Pr
oce
ss liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s th
rough t
he
anal
yser
, in
acc
ord
ance
with o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
2.3
D
eal pro
mptly
and e
ffec
tive
ly w
ith e
rror
mes
sages
or
equip
men
t fa
ults
that
are
within
your
contr
ol,
and r
eport
those
that
cannot
be
solv
ed
2.4
M
onitor
the
equip
men
t pro
cess
and e
nsu
re t
hat
the
outp
ut
readin
gs
are
to t
he
required
spec
ific
atio
n
2.5
Shut
dow
n t
he
equip
men
t an
d r
eturn
the
work
are
a
to a
safe
conditio
n o
n c
oncl
usi
on o
f th
e ac
tivi
ties
2.6
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion t
o
auth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal
and o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
114
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.7
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e liq
uid
com
pound/s
am
ple
pro
cess
ing,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
liquid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
115
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
labora
tory
liq
uid
com
pound/s
ample
re
ception s
yste
m
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
m,
and p
roce
dure
s use
d for
liquid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
inim
um
siz
e/vo
lum
e of liq
uid
co
mpound/s
ample
req
uired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e lo
cation for
each
cat
egory
of
liquid
co
mpound/s
ample
that
can
be
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
3.1
3
Des
crib
e th
e ty
pes
of liq
uid
com
pound/s
ample
and
conta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
ation
3.1
4
Exp
lain
how
to a
sses
s if a
liq
uid
com
pound/s
ample
is
suitable
for
anal
ysis
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
116
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
how
to s
tart
and s
hut
dow
n t
he
anal
yser
/equip
men
t (i
ncl
udin
g w
hat
to d
o in a
n
emer
gen
cy)
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to c
arry
out
daily
pre
-run c
hec
ks,
and
how
to iden
tify
the
stat
us
of
the
anal
yser
/equip
men
t
4.3
Exp
lain
how
to load
a liq
uid
com
pound/s
am
ple
into
th
e an
alys
er/e
quip
men
t, a
nd h
ow
to initia
te t
he
sam
ple
anal
ysis
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
appro
priat
e act
ion t
o t
ake
when
liq
uid
co
mpound/s
ample
sam
plin
g o
r eq
uip
men
t er
rors
occ
ur
4.5
Exp
lain
how
to u
nlo
ad liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s fr
om
the
analy
ser/
equip
men
t, a
nd h
ow
to s
tore
th
em a
fter
anal
ysis
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a liq
uid
co
mpound/s
ample
does
not
mat
ch u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
ation r
eques
t fo
rms
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g liq
uid
com
pound/s
ample
is
iden
tified
in t
he
labora
tory
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
liq
uid
com
pound/s
ample
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
117
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring
inve
stig
ations
(such
as
han
d w
ritt
en o
r bar
-coded
la
bel
s)
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e fa
ctors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
liquid
com
pound/s
am
ple
m
ater
ial or
sam
ple
during s
tora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e ri
sks
and h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sa
mple
s, a
nd h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
3
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g a
liq
uid
com
pound/s
ample
4.1
4
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
, and t
he
tran
sport
ation t
o b
e use
d,
when
des
pat
chin
g a
liq
uid
com
pound/
sam
ple
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
118
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
119
Unit 13: Assisting with the processing of liquid compounds/samples using manual laboratory techniques
Unit reference number: H/601/2025
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 6
Guided learning hours: 40
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the processing of liquid compounds/samples for laboratory investigation, using manual techniques. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting liquid compounds/samples in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to processing liquid compounds/samples manually in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after specimen/sample processing activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
120
and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
121
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t as
appro
priat
e fo
r th
e co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s bei
ng h
andle
d:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
122
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g p
roce
ssin
g o
per
atio
ns:
–
tran
sport
liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s ar
ound t
he
labora
tory
, an
d s
tore
them
appro
priat
ely
–
sele
ct a
suitab
le w
ork
are
a for
the
man
ual te
sts
–
sele
ct a
nd s
et u
p t
he
nec
essa
ry e
quip
men
t co
rrec
tly
–
use
the
nec
essa
ry m
ater
ials
for
the
man
ual
tes
ts
–
follo
w t
he
def
ined
pro
cedure
s, a
nd a
pply
saf
e w
ork
ing p
ract
ices
and p
roce
dure
s
–
dis
pose
of
was
te s
afe
ly a
nd c
orr
ectly
–
ensu
re t
hat
the
anal
yses
pro
duce
d m
eet
the
spec
ific
atio
n for
the
required
qual
ity
and
accu
racy
1.5
O
bta
in t
he
appro
priate
equip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
for
the
man
ual te
sts
required
1.6
Conduct
man
ual
labora
tory
tes
ts o
n liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s, u
sing t
he
corr
ect
pro
cedure
s an
d t
echniq
ues
1.7
U
se t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing m
ater
ials
for
the
man
ual
te
sts:
–
com
pound s
ample
s
–
reag
ents
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
123
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
2.1
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing w
ork
are
as for
the
man
ual
tes
ts:
–
fum
e cu
pboar
d
–
posi
tive
pre
ssure
cab
inet
–
labora
tory
ben
ch
–
safe
ty c
abin
et
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.2
Conduct
thre
e of
the
follo
win
g m
anual
lab
ora
tory
te
sts:
–
pH
of so
lution
–
spec
ific
gra
vity
–
colo
ur
of
solu
tion
–
clar
ity
of so
lution
–
refr
act
ive
index
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.3
Rec
ord
the
resu
lts
of
the
man
ual te
sts,
in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
ating p
roce
dure
s
2.4
D
ispose
of
wast
e item
s fr
om
the
man
ual la
bora
tory
te
sts,
in a
ccord
ance
with s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g
pro
cedure
s
2.5
Ret
urn
equip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
that
can b
e use
d
for
test
ing,
to t
he
corr
ect
stora
ge
loca
tion
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
124
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e liq
uid
com
pound/s
am
ple
pro
cess
ing,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
125
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
labora
tory
sam
ple
rec
eption s
yste
m
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
ms,
an
d t
he
pro
cedure
s use
d f
or
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
inim
um
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
/sam
ple
s re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e lo
cation for
each
cat
egory
of
spec
imen
/sam
ple
s th
at c
an b
e re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s usi
ng
auto
mat
ed lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of sp
ecim
en/s
ample
s and
spec
imen
/sam
ple
s co
nta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
atio
n
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to a
sses
s if a
com
pound/s
am
ple
is
suitab
le f
or
anal
ysis
4.3
Exp
lain
how
to u
se a
nd t
ake
a r
eadin
g fro
m m
anual
test
kits
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
126
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s do n
ot
matc
h u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
ation r
eques
t fo
rms
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
am
ple
is
iden
tified
in t
he
labora
tory
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
sam
ple
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling c
om
pounds/
sam
ple
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring
inve
stig
ations
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
sam
ple
during s
tora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e ri
sks
and h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sa
mple
s, a
nd h
ow
thes
e ca
n b
e m
inim
ised
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
ethods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
and t
he
tran
sport
ation t
o b
e use
d w
hen
des
pat
chin
g liq
uid
co
mpounds/
sam
ple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
127
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
128
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
129
Unit 14: Accessing, registering and inputting batch/sample data in a LIMS under supervision
Unit reference number: K/601/2026
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 6
Guided learning hours: 34
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to access, register and input batch/sample data in a Laboratory Information Management System. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials or equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to accessing, registering and inputting data into a batch/sample records system in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after work on the batch/sample records system. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
130
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
131
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Acc
ess,
reg
iste
r an
d input
bat
ch/s
ample
dat
a in
a
LIM
S u
nder
super
visi
on
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
U
se c
orr
ect
pass
word
s to
acc
ess
the
rele
vant
labora
tory
dat
abase
s, a
nd m
ainta
in t
he
secu
rity
an
d inte
gri
ty o
f in
form
atio
n
1.3
U
se c
orr
ect
sear
ch p
roce
dure
s to
confirm
that
bat
ch
dem
ogra
phic
dat
a on s
ample
s re
ceiv
ed a
re c
orr
ect
with e
xist
ing d
ata o
n t
he
labora
tory
rec
ord
sys
tem
1.4
Fo
llow
the
corr
ect
pro
toco
ls for
regis
tering n
ew
bat
ch/s
ample
dat
a onto
the
Labora
tory
Info
rmation
Man
agem
ent
Sys
tem
(LI
MS)
1.5
Sel
ect
the
corr
ect
labora
tory
data
file
s, a
nd
accu
rate
ly input
bat
ch d
etails
with t
he
reques
ted
test
s fo
r ea
ch s
ample
1.6
Acc
ess
and input
bat
ch/s
ample
dat
a fo
r al
l of
the
follo
win
g:
–
bat
ch n
um
ber
–
org
anis
atio
n n
um
ber
–
labora
tory
num
ber
–
labora
tory
tes
t bei
ng d
one
–
det
ails
for
trac
king a
ny
third p
art
y te
stin
g
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
132
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.7
Est
ablis
h d
ata
requirem
ents
for
six
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
sam
ple
des
crip
tion
–
dat
e of
sam
ple
–
bat
ch s
ourc
e
–
LIM
S n
um
ber
–
det
ails
of th
e bat
ches
/sam
ple
s se
nt
and r
ecei
ved
–
clie
nt
sendin
g b
atc
hes
/sam
ple
s
–
clie
nt’s
loca
tion
–
des
tinat
ion(s
) fo
r re
sults
2
Acc
ess,
reg
iste
r an
d input
bat
ch/s
ample
dat
a in
a
LIM
S u
nder
super
visi
on
(continued
)
2.1
Com
ple
te t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing d
epar
tmen
t bat
ch/s
ample
iden
tifica
tion a
ctiv
itie
s:
–
writing c
odes
on t
he
bat
ch/s
ample
–
addin
g b
arco
des
to t
he
bat
ch/s
ample
–
chec
king b
atch
/sam
ple
codes
agai
nst
LIM
S
dat
abase
–
scan
nin
g b
arco
des
and c
hec
king L
IMS d
atabas
e
2.2
Res
olv
e th
e pro
ble
ms
that
aris
e w
hen
the
required
bat
ch/s
ample
info
rmat
ion a
nd d
ata
cannot
be
found
or
matc
hed
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
133
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.3
Res
olv
e tw
o o
f th
e fo
llow
ing d
ata
pro
ble
ms
asso
ciate
d w
ith b
atch
es/s
ample
s:
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
poor/
uncl
ear
label
ling
–
dam
aged
/mis
sing label
ling
2.4
Pe
rform
thes
e ta
sks
in a
tim
ely
man
ner
, co
mpat
ible
w
ith t
he
labora
tory
sch
edule
s.
2.5
Req
ues
t hel
p f
rom
appro
priat
e peo
ple
when
you a
re
unab
le t
o r
esolv
e pro
ble
ms
with m
ism
atch
ed a
nd
inco
mple
te b
atch
/sam
ple
det
ails
2.6
Com
munic
ate
labora
tory
info
rmat
ion t
o a
uth
orise
d
peo
ple
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d
org
anis
atio
nal
pro
cedure
s
2.7
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
134
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3
Know
how
to a
cces
s,
regis
ter
and input
bat
ch/s
ample
dat
a in
a
LIM
S u
nder
super
visi
on
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in t
he
loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
atin
g m
anual
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
dat
a s
ecurity
req
uirem
ents
for
diffe
rent
com
pute
r applic
atio
ns,
and t
he
acc
essi
ng
and s
tora
ge
of dat
a
3.6
Exp
lain
how
to a
cces
s an
d s
tore
dat
a, in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
ating p
roce
dure
s an
d
org
anis
atio
nal
pra
ctic
es
3.7
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in a
ccura
te
bat
ch a
nd d
epar
tmen
t re
cord
s fo
r sa
mple
s
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
polic
ies
and p
roce
dure
s fo
r th
e ac
cura
te r
egis
trat
ion o
f new
batc
hes
/sam
ple
s on
the
Labora
tory
Info
rmat
ion M
anag
emen
t Sys
tem
(L
IMS)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
135
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
spec
ific
safe
ty p
reca
utions
to b
e ta
ken
when
work
ing w
ith c
om
pute
r sy
stem
s (t
o incl
ude
such
thin
gs
as
safe
ty g
uid
ance
rel
atin
g t
o t
he
use
of
visu
al d
ispla
y unit (
VD
U)
equip
men
t an
d
work
stat
ion e
nvi
ronm
ent
(such
as
lighting,
seat
ing,
posi
tionin
g o
f eq
uip
men
t),
repet
itiv
e st
rain
inju
ry
(RSI)
; th
e dan
ger
s of
trai
ling lea
ds
and c
able
s; h
ow
to
spot
faulty
or
dan
ger
ous
elec
tric
al lea
ds,
plu
gs
and c
onnec
tions)
3.1
0
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in g
ood
house
keep
ing a
rran
gem
ents
(su
ch a
s putt
ing d
isks
, m
anual
s and u
nw
ante
d ite
ms
of eq
uip
men
t in
to
safe
sto
rage;
lea
ving t
he
work
are
a in a
saf
e an
d
tidy
conditio
n)
4
Know
how
to a
cces
s,
regis
ter
and input
bat
ch/s
ample
dat
a in
a
LIM
S u
nder
super
visi
on
(continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
n a
nd lab
ora
tory
num
ber
s
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve.
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
basi
c se
t-up a
nd o
per
atio
n o
f th
e la
bora
tory
rec
ord
s sy
stem
, an
d t
he
per
ipher
al
dev
ices
that
are
use
d (
such
as
mouse
, ke
yboar
d,
VD
U,
pri
nte
r and b
arco
de
reader
)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
136
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling liq
uid
com
pounds/
sam
ple
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring
inve
stig
atio
ns
(such
as
han
d w
ritt
en o
r bar
coded
la
bel
s)
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
corr
ect
star
tup a
nd s
hutd
ow
n
pro
cedure
s to
be
use
d for
the
com
pute
r sy
stem
4.7
Exp
lain
how
to a
cces
s th
e sp
ecific
com
pute
r La
bora
tory
Info
rmat
ion M
anagem
ent
Sys
tem
(L
IMS)
data
bas
e to
be
use
d,
and t
he
use
of
soft
war
e m
anual
s and r
elat
ed d
ocu
men
ts t
o a
id
effici
ent
oper
atio
n o
f th
e re
leva
nt
labora
tory
re
cord
s sy
stem
4.8
Exp
lain
how
to d
eal w
ith s
yste
m p
roble
ms
(such
as
erro
r m
essa
ges
rec
eive
d,
per
ipher
als
whic
h d
o n
ot
resp
ond a
s ex
pec
ted,
obvi
ous
faults
with t
he
equip
men
t or
connec
ting lea
ds)
4.9
Exp
lain
how
to c
om
munic
ate
effe
ctiv
ely,
and h
ow
to
iden
tify
key
info
rmat
ion w
hen
rec
ord
ing a
nd
forw
ardin
g m
essa
ges
acc
ura
tely
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e te
st c
odes
, co
ded
com
men
ts,
reques
tor
and loca
tion c
odes
, and b
atch
/sam
ple
co
mm
ent
codes
req
uired
to a
ccura
tely
input
and
reques
t batc
h/s
ample
and lab
ora
tory
data
, ap
pro
priat
e to
thei
r are
a of w
ork
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
137
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
138
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
139
Unit 15: Assisting with the preparation of solutions for laboratory use
Unit reference number: M/601/2027
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 9
Guided learning hours: 51
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with preparation of solutions for laboratory investigations. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operation procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work requirements. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory investigations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to the preparation of solutions in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after solution preparation activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
140
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
141
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion
of
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
olu
tions
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t during t
he
pre
par
ation o
f so
lutions:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
Confirm
that
equip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
are
fit f
or
purp
ose
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
142
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
Confirm
that
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing e
quip
men
t an
d
inst
rum
ents
are
fit f
or
purp
ose
:
–
wei
ghin
g/b
alan
ce e
quip
men
t
–
pip
ette
s
–
mag
net
ic s
tirr
er
–
mea
suri
ng c
ylin
der
s
–
volu
met
ric
flask
s
–
pH
met
er
–
mix
ers
–
hotp
late
1.6
Corr
ectly
mea
sure
the
mass
and v
olu
me
of
mat
eria
ls,
as s
et d
ow
n in lab
ora
tory
inst
ruct
ions
1.7
M
easu
re m
ass
and v
olu
me,
with a
ll of th
e fo
llow
ing
equip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
ele
ctro
nic
wei
ghin
g e
quip
men
t
–
volu
met
ric
equip
men
t
–
labora
tory
bal
ance
and w
eights
–
conta
inm
ent
equip
men
t
1.8
M
ix m
ater
ials
, in
the
corr
ect
ord
er a
nd a
t th
e te
mper
ature
set
dow
n in lab
ora
tory
inst
ruct
ions
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
143
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion
of
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
(co
ntinued
)
2.1
Corr
ectly
mea
sure
and m
ix b
oth
of
the
follo
win
g
mat
eria
ls:
–
solid
s
–
liquid
s
2.2
Tra
nsf
er t
he
solu
tion t
o t
he
required
conta
iner
, and
mak
e up t
o t
he
volu
me
spec
ifie
d in lab
ora
tory
in
stru
ctio
ns
2.3
M
easu
re t
he
pH
of
mad
e-up s
olu
tions
acc
ura
tely
, an
d lab
el t
he
conta
iner
s co
rrec
tly
2.4
Acc
ura
tely
lab
el s
tora
ge
conta
iner
s of m
ade-
up
solu
tion w
ith a
ll of th
e fo
llow
ing info
rmat
ion:
–
bat
ch n
um
ber
s
–
expiry
dat
es
–
volu
mes
–
safe
ty info
rmat
ion
–
conce
ntr
atio
n
2.5
Sto
re m
ade-
up s
olu
tions
in t
he
corr
ect
stora
ge
loca
tions
2.6
D
ispose
of
was
te,
as
spec
ifie
d in lab
ora
tory
in
stru
ctio
ns
2.7
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion t
o
auth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal
and o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
144
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.8
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e pre
par
ation w
ork
done,
and
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f so
lutions
for
labora
tory
use
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce.
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in t
he
loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
atin
g m
anual
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
solu
tions
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
145
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve.
3.8
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to m
ainta
in a
ccura
te
labora
tory
rec
ord
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
mea
nin
g o
f th
e va
rious
nota
tions
use
d
in t
he
labora
tory
for
wei
ghts
and v
olu
mes
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e ty
pes
and r
ange
of m
ate
rials
that
hav
e to
be
mea
sure
d in t
he
labora
tory
3.1
1
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
that
mat
eria
ls a
re
accu
rate
ly m
easu
red
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e pote
ntial
err
ors
or
mis
take
s th
at c
an
be
made
in m
easu
ring m
ater
ials
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f so
lutions
for
labora
tory
use
(co
ntinued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
how
to u
se w
eighin
g/b
alan
ce a
nd
mea
suring e
quip
men
t co
rrec
tly
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
range
of vo
lum
es a
nd m
ass
es o
f m
ater
ials
that
are
req
uired
for
labora
tory
use
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of so
lution t
hat
hav
e to
be
pre
par
ed in t
he
labora
tory
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
equip
men
t th
at is
nee
ded
for
pre
par
ing s
olu
tions,
and h
ow
to u
se it
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
146
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.5
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
to a
dd m
ate
rials
to
get
her
in t
he
corr
ect
sequen
ce t
o p
roduce
la
bora
tory
solu
tions
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
range
of te
mper
atu
res
at w
hic
h
spec
ific
solu
tions
must
be
pre
pare
d
4.7
Exp
lain
why
it is
import
ant
that
solid
mat
eria
ls a
re
com
ple
tely
dis
solv
ed in a
solu
tion
4.8
Exp
lain
how
to m
ake
up s
olu
tions
from
dry
pow
der
s
4.9
Exp
lain
how
to u
se g
raduat
ed v
olu
met
ric
conta
iner
s
4.1
0
Exp
lain
how
to lab
el s
olu
tions
corr
ectly
4.1
1
Exp
lain
wher
e an
d h
ow
to s
tore
solu
tions
corr
ectly
4.1
2
Exp
lain
how
to d
ispose
of w
ast
e sa
fely
, in
ac
cord
ance
with s
tandar
d o
per
ating p
roce
dure
s
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
147
Unit 16: Measuring, weighing and preparing compounds and solutions for laboratory use
Unit reference number: H/601/8195
QCF level: 3
Credit value: 16
Guided learning hours: 66
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to measure, weigh and prepare compounds and solutions for laboratory investigations. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. The learner will be required to work to the relevant standard operating procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP). The learner will also be required to present records and details of their laboratory work to the appropriate people.
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the measuring, weighing and preparations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work with a minimum of supervision, either on their own or as part of a team, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to measuring, weighing and preparing compounds and solutions in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after the measuring, weighing and preparation activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
148
achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
149
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Mea
sure
, w
eigh a
nd
pre
par
e co
mpounds
and
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g m
ater
ials
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
U
se lab
ora
tory
sca
les
for
accu
rate
ly w
eighin
g o
ut
mat
eria
ls,
usi
ng m
etric/
imper
ial m
easu
res
1.5
Car
ry o
ut
wei
ghin
g a
ctiv
itie
s usi
ng b
ala
nce
s (s
cale
s),
usi
ng t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing a
ccura
cies
:
–
gra
ms
–
mill
igra
ms
–
mic
rogra
ms
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
150
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.6
M
easu
re o
ut
aliq
uots
of
solu
tions,
usi
ng f
our
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
auto
mat
ed p
ipet
tes
–
gra
duat
ed/b
ulb
pip
ette
s
–
syringes
–
gra
duat
ed c
ylin
der
s/bea
kers
/tubes
–
bure
ttes
–
volu
met
ric
flask
s
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.7
Acc
ura
tely
mea
sure
pH
and c
onduct
ivity
of
solu
tions
in t
he
labora
tory
, usi
ng c
orr
ectly
calib
rate
d m
eter
s
1.8
M
easu
re o
ut
aliq
uots
of liq
uid
s in
to t
ubes
and
mic
rotr
ays
for
labora
tory
use
and a
nal
ysis
2
Mea
sure
, w
eigh a
nd
pre
par
e co
mpounds
and
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
(co
ntinued
)
2.1
M
easu
re liq
uid
s an
d s
olid
s fo
r la
bora
tory
use
and
anal
ysis
2.2
M
easu
re p
H a
nd/o
r co
nduct
ivity,
usi
ng t
wo o
f th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
han
dhel
d p
H m
eter
–
ben
ch t
op p
H m
eter
–
com
bin
ed p
H/c
onduct
ivity
met
er
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
151
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
–
co
nduct
ivity
met
er
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.3
Cal
ibra
te o
r ch
eck
the
calib
ration for
two o
f th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
pH
met
er
–
bal
ance
–
conduct
ivity
met
er
–
pip
ette
s
–
oth
er(p
lease
spec
ify)
2.4
Cal
cula
te t
he
conce
ntr
atio
ns
of
solu
tions,
the
amounts
and v
olu
mes
req
uired
, usi
ng four
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
mole
s per
litre
–
gra
ms
per
litre
–
par
ts p
er m
illio
n
–
mas
s per
cent
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.5
M
ake
up k
now
n v
olu
mes
of
solu
tions
to a
spec
ifie
d
conce
ntr
atio
n,
usi
ng b
oth
of
the
follo
win
g:
–
by
mea
suri
ng a
nd d
isso
lvin
g t
he
corr
ect
am
ount
of
solu
te in t
he
corr
ect
volu
me
of dilu
ent/
solv
ent
–
by
dilu
tion fro
m a
conce
ntr
ate
d s
tock
solu
tion
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
152
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.6
W
eigh a
nd p
repare
thre
e of
the
follo
win
g t
ypes
of
com
pound o
r so
lution:
–
pow
der
s/gra
nula
tions
that
do n
ot
read
ily lose
or
gai
n w
eight
(mois
ture
or
solv
ent)
–
solid
s th
at r
eadily
lose
or
gai
n w
eight
(mois
ture
or
solv
ent)
–
liquid
sam
ple
s (b
y diffe
rence
)
–
liquid
sam
ple
s (d
irec
t)
2.7
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion a
bout
the
work
done,
to a
uth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
w
ith d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rganis
ational
pro
cedure
s.
2.8
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
work
done,
and c
om
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
(e.
g.
labora
tory
note
book)
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
153
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3
Know
how
to m
easu
re,
wei
gh a
nd p
repar
e co
mpounds
and s
olu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
nal
or
labora
tory
num
ber
s
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.8
Exp
lain
how
to c
alcu
late
mass
/mole
cal
cula
tions
in
met
ric
and/o
r im
per
ial m
easu
res
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
154
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.9
Exp
lain
how
to s
elec
t th
e appro
priat
e bal
ance
and
scal
e fo
r le
ss t
han
100m
g,
100m
g t
o 5
g,
and 5
g
and a
bove
3.1
0
Exp
lain
how
to c
hec
k th
at a
pip
ette
is
clea
n,
dry
, fr
ee o
f ch
ips
and r
eady
for
use
4
Know
how
to m
easu
re,
wei
gh a
nd p
repar
e co
mpounds
and s
olu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
(c
ontinued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
how
to c
hec
k th
e ca
libra
tion o
n a
pip
ette
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to c
alib
rate
and c
hec
k th
e ca
libra
tion
on a
pH
met
er
4.3
Exp
lain
how
to c
alib
rate
and c
hec
k th
e ca
libra
tion
on a
bal
ance
4.4
Exp
lain
how
to c
alib
rate
and c
hec
k th
e ca
libra
tion
on a
conduct
ivity
met
er
4.5
Exp
lain
how
to m
easu
re a
nd w
eigh s
olid
s an
d
liquid
s fo
r la
bora
tory
use
4.6
Exp
lain
how
to c
onve
rt b
etw
een d
iffe
rent
units
of
conce
ntr
atio
n (
such
as
mole
s/lit
re,
gra
ms/
litre
, per
cent
mas
s per
volu
me
and p
arts
per
mill
ion)
4.7
Exp
lain
how
to c
alcu
late
dilu
tion fact
ors
and d
ilution
volu
mes
to m
ake
solu
tions
from
conce
ntr
ated
sto
ck
solu
tions
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
155
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
pH
sca
le a
s a
logarith
mic
sca
le for
the
mea
sure
men
t of th
e ac
idity
of aqueo
us
solu
tions,
an
d t
he
import
ance
of pH
to b
iolo
gic
al sy
stem
s an
d
pro
cess
es
4.9
Exp
lain
how
to c
hoose
the
appro
priat
e m
easu
ring
equip
men
t fo
r th
e sc
ale,
acc
ura
cy a
nd p
reci
sion
required
for
the
task
4.1
0
Exp
lain
how
to c
lean
and m
ain
tain
the
pip
ette
s,
bal
ance
s, p
H m
eter
pro
bes
and c
onduct
ivity
met
er
pro
bes
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
156
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
157
Unit 17: Assisting with the processing of diagnostic cytology specimens in the laboratory
Unit reference number: T/601/2028
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 3
Guided learning hours: 17
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the processing of diagnostic cytology specimens/samples for laboratory investigations. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operating procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work. This may involve putting cytology specimens/samples in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials or equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory processing undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to processing diagnostic cytology specimens/samples manually in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after specimen/sample processing activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
158
work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
159
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of dia
gnost
ic c
ytolo
gy
spec
imen
s in
the
labora
tory
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
160
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g p
roce
ssin
g o
per
atio
ns:
–
tran
sport
liq
uid
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s ar
ound t
he
labora
tory
, an
d s
tore
them
appro
priat
ely
–
sele
ct a
suitab
le w
ork
are
a for
the
spec
imen
/sam
ple
pro
cess
ing
–
sele
ct a
nd s
et u
p t
he
nec
essa
ry e
quip
men
t co
rrec
tly
–
use
the
nec
essa
ry m
ater
ials
for
the
spec
imen
/sam
ple
pro
cess
ing
–
sort
and s
tain
the
slid
e pre
par
atio
ns
–
follo
w a
nd a
pply
safe
work
ing p
ract
ices
and
pro
cedure
s
–
dis
pose
of
was
te s
afe
ly a
nd c
orr
ectly
–
pro
duce
slid
e pre
par
ations
to t
he
required
qual
ity
and a
ccura
cy
–
pla
ce t
he
slid
e pre
para
tions
in t
he
appro
priat
e lo
cation f
or
mic
rosc
opic
anal
ysis
–
store
slid
e pre
par
ations
in t
he
corr
ect
loca
tion
follo
win
g a
nal
ysis
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
161
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing for
the
spec
imen
/sam
ple
pre
par
ation:
–
clin
ical
spec
imen
s
–
reag
ents
–
mic
rosc
ope
slid
es
–
filter
s fo
r ce
ll co
nce
ntr
atio
n
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.6
Ass
ist
with t
he
pre
para
tion o
f th
ree
of
the
follo
win
g
spec
imen
/sam
ple
typ
es:
–
urine
–
sem
en
–
fine
nee
dle
asp
irat
es
–
ple
ura
l/as
citic
fluid
s
–
sputu
m
–
synovi
al flu
id
–
bro
nch
ial asp
irate
/lava
ge
–
endosc
opic
bru
sh s
am
ple
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
162
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.7
Tak
e ap
pro
pri
ate
action for
unsu
itab
le
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s in
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing
situ
atio
ns:
–
insu
ffic
ient
volu
me
–
inco
rrec
t co
nta
iner
–
inco
rrec
t la
bel
ling
–
inco
rrec
t sa
mple
–
inco
rrec
t st
ora
ge
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
pro
cess
ing
of dia
gnost
ic c
ytolo
gy
spec
imen
s in
the
labora
tory
(co
ntinued
)
2.1
Pr
epare
sam
ple
s an
d s
lides
in a
suitab
le w
ork
are
a,
with t
he
appro
priat
e eq
uip
men
t an
d m
ater
ials
2.2
Sto
re t
he
pre
par
ed s
lides
in t
he
corr
ect
loca
tion for
scre
enin
g
2.3
Ret
urn
the
equip
men
t an
d w
ork
are
a t
o t
he
corr
ect
conditio
n follo
win
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
pre
par
atio
n
2.4
Arc
hiv
e sl
ides
follo
win
g a
nal
ysis
and s
tore
sam
ple
re
mai
ns
appro
priat
ely
2.5
Ret
riev
e ar
chiv
ed s
am
ple
s an
d s
lides
, an
d r
eturn
to
stora
ge
when
req
uired
2.6
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion o
n
labora
tory
work
done,
to a
uth
orise
d p
eople
, in
ac
cord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s ac
cord
ance
with s
tandar
d o
per
ating
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
163
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.7
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e pre
par
ation w
ork
done,
and
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f dia
gnost
ic c
ytolo
gy
spec
imen
s in
the
labora
tory
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stan
dar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s, a
s se
t dow
n in loca
l la
bora
tory
oper
ating m
anuals
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
164
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
labora
tory
spec
imen
/sam
ple
rec
eption
syst
em
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
m,
and t
he
pro
cedure
s use
d f
or
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s under
goin
g inve
stig
ation in t
he
labora
tory
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
nal
or
labora
tory
num
ber
s
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e m
inim
um
siz
e/vo
lum
e of
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
quired
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
conduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e ty
pes
of sp
ecim
en/s
ample
and
spec
imen
/sam
ple
conta
iner
use
d in t
he
labora
tory
, an
d t
hose
that
are
nee
ded
for
each
inve
stig
atio
n
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
pro
cess
ing o
f dia
gnost
ic c
ytolo
gy
spec
imen
s in
the
labora
tory
(co
ntinued
)
4.1
Exp
lain
how
to a
sses
s if a
spec
imen
/sam
ple
is
suitab
le f
or
anal
ysis
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
when
dea
ling w
ith r
outine
and u
rgen
t sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
165
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s do n
ot
mat
ch u
p w
ith t
he
inve
stig
ation r
eques
t fo
rms
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a
bro
ken o
r le
akin
g s
pec
imen
/sam
ple
is
iden
tified
in
the
labora
tory
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
to b
e fo
llow
ed w
hen
a h
igh
risk
spec
imen
/sam
ple
is
rece
ived
by
the
labora
tory
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
num
ber
ing a
nd
label
ling s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s re
ceiv
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
, an
d t
he
sam
ple
s ta
ken d
uring
pro
cess
ing/i
nve
stig
atio
ns
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
spec
imen
/sam
ple
during s
tora
ge
or
tran
sit
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
risk
s an
d h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s, a
nd h
ow
th
ese
can b
e m
inim
ised
4.9
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
pac
kagin
g a
nd
des
patc
hin
g o
f sp
ecim
ens/
sam
ple
s
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
, and t
he
tran
sport
ation t
o b
e use
d,
when
des
pat
chin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
for
the
stora
ge
and d
isposa
l of
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
166
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e pro
cedure
s to
be
follo
wed
for
the
long
term
sto
rage
of
sam
ple
s/sl
ides
tak
en d
uri
ng
pro
cess
ing/
inve
stig
ations
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
167
Unit 18: Assisting with the routine maintenance, cleaning, disinfecting and calibration of laboratory equipment
Unit reference number: A/601/2029
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 6
Guided learning hours: 34
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with the routine maintenance, disinfecting, cleaning and calibration of equipment used for laboratory investigations. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operating procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory maintenance, disinfecting and cleaning undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to the maintenance, disinfecting and cleaning of equipment in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after the maintenance, disinfecting and cleaning
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
168
activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
169
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Ass
ist
with t
he
routine
mai
nte
nan
ce,
clea
nin
g,
dis
infe
ctin
g a
nd c
alib
ration
of la
bora
tory
equip
men
t
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
170
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g o
per
atio
ns:
–
adher
e to
pro
cedure
s or
syst
ems
in p
lace
for
risk
as
sess
men
t, C
OSH
H,
per
sonal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t an
d o
ther
rel
evan
t sa
fety
reg
ula
tions
–
ensu
re t
he
safe
iso
lation o
f la
bora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (s
uch
as
elec
tric
al an
d flu
ids
supply
)
–
follo
w m
anufa
cture
rs’ in
stru
ctio
ns,
dra
win
gs
and
pro
cedure
s fo
r ro
utine
mai
nte
nan
ce
–
chec
k th
at t
he
tools
and e
quip
men
t use
d a
re in a
sa
fe a
nd u
sable
conditio
n
–
ensu
re t
hat
the
labora
tory
equip
men
t is
kep
t fr
ee fro
m f
ore
ign o
bje
cts,
dir
t or
oth
er
conta
min
ation
–
carr
y out
dis
infe
ctio
n o
f la
bora
tory
equip
men
t, in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
ating p
roce
dure
s
–
carr
y out
auditory
and v
isual
chec
ks o
n t
he
oper
atio
n o
f la
bora
tory
equip
men
t
–
confirm
that
the
labora
tory
equip
men
t is
ca
libra
ted c
orr
ectly
and is
ready
for
use
–
retu
rn a
ll to
ols
, eq
uip
men
t an
d w
aste
to t
he
corr
ect
loca
tions
on c
om
ple
tion o
f th
e m
ainte
nan
ce a
ctiv
itie
s
–
ensu
re t
hat
accu
rate
, co
mple
te a
nd leg
ible
re
cord
s ar
e ke
pt
of
the
mai
nte
nan
ce a
ctiv
itie
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
171
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.6
Confirm
that
the
labora
tory
equip
men
t is
in a
saf
e an
d u
sable
conditio
n,
acco
rdin
g t
o e
stab
lished
pro
cedure
s
1.7
Id
entify
and r
eport
any
labora
tory
equip
men
t fa
ults
accu
rate
ly t
o t
he
team
lea
der
1.8
Car
ry o
ut
mai
nte
nan
ce,
dis
infe
ctio
n a
nd c
lean
ing o
n
five
of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of eq
uip
men
t:
–
wei
ghin
g a
nd m
easu
ring e
quip
men
t
–
wat
er p
urifica
tion s
yste
m
–
pH
met
er
–
tem
per
ature
-contr
olle
d a
ppar
atus
–
centr
ifuges
–
labora
tory
anal
yser
/tes
ting e
quip
men
t
–
slid
e st
ainin
g m
ach
ine
–
tiss
ue
pro
cess
or
–
culture
med
ia p
repar
ator
–
safe
ty c
abin
et/f
um
e cu
pboar
d
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2
Ass
ist
with t
he
routine
mai
nte
nan
ce,
clea
nin
g,
dis
infe
ctin
g a
nd c
alib
ration
of la
bora
tory
equip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
2.1
Per
form
routine
mai
nte
nan
ce in a
ccord
ance
with
man
ufa
cture
rs’ in
stru
ctio
ns
and r
elev
ant
hea
lth a
nd
safe
ty leg
isla
tion
2.2
Adher
e to
the
set-
dow
n h
ygie
ne
regula
tions
during
the
clea
nin
g a
nd d
isin
fect
ing o
f la
bora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
172
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.3
Confirm
the
corr
ect
oper
atio
n a
nd c
alib
ration o
f th
e la
bora
tory
equip
men
t, in a
ccord
ance
with
esta
blis
hed
pro
cedure
s
2.4
Rec
ord
det
ails
of
main
tenan
ce a
nd c
alib
ration,
acco
rdin
g t
o d
epart
men
tal pro
cedure
s
2.5
Tes
t th
e eq
uip
men
t to
confirm
that
it
funct
ions
corr
ectly,
and r
ecord
the
equip
men
t st
atus
2.6
Com
munic
ate
the
work
done,
to a
uth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rgan
isat
ional
pro
cedure
s
2.7
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e pre
par
ation w
ork
done,
and
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
routine
mai
nte
nance
, cl
eanin
g,
dis
infe
ctin
g a
nd
calib
ration o
f la
bora
tory
eq
uip
men
t
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
173
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
man
ufa
cture
rs’ sp
ecific
ations
and
reco
mm
endat
ions
for
the
mai
nte
nan
ce a
nd
calib
ration o
f th
e la
bora
tory
equip
men
t
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
visu
ally
chec
king,
and c
lean
ing,
of la
bora
tory
equip
men
t
4
Know
how
to a
ssis
t w
ith
the
routine
mai
nte
nance
, cl
eanin
g,
dis
infe
ctin
g a
nd
calib
ration o
f la
bora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (c
ontinued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
diffe
rent
types
, co
nditio
n a
nd
quan
tities
of
consu
mab
les
required
for
the
range
of
labora
tory
equip
men
t m
ainta
ined
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
for
mai
nta
inin
g p
erso
nal
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty d
uri
ng t
he
main
tenan
ce o
f eq
uip
men
t
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
for
mai
nta
inin
g p
erso
nal
hyg
iene
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
174
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
org
anis
atio
nal
and d
epart
men
tal
infe
ctio
n c
ontr
ol polic
y, a
s applie
d t
o m
ainte
nan
ce
activi
ties
in t
he
labora
tory
4.5
Exp
lain
how
to c
hec
k th
at t
he
labora
tory
equip
men
t is
work
ing c
orr
ectly
and in a
ccord
ance
with t
he
man
ufa
cture
r’s
spec
ific
atio
ns
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
com
mon t
ypes
of
equip
men
t fa
ult,
and
how
thes
e m
ust
be
dea
lt w
ith
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
dep
art
men
t or
per
son t
o w
hom
eq
uip
men
t fa
ults
should
be
report
ed
4.8
D
escr
ibe
the
met
hods
use
d f
or
keep
ing r
ecord
s of
the
mai
nte
nan
ce,
clea
nin
g,
dis
infe
ctio
n a
nd
calib
ration o
f la
bora
tory
equip
men
t, a
nd w
hy
this
is
import
ant
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
175
Unit 19: Preparing culture media and solutions for laboratory use
Unit reference number: M/601/2030
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 3
Guided learning hours: 18
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to assist with preparing culture media and solutions for laboratory use. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, and in accordance with approved procedures and practices, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations, within the scope of their responsibility. This may include preparing the work area and ensuring that it is in a safe condition to carry out the intended activities, and ensuring that any materials, equipment or other resources required are available and are in a safe and usable condition. They will be required to work to the relevant standard operating procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
On completion of the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to return their immediate work area to an acceptable condition before undertaking further work. This may involve putting processed paperwork in the correct location, returning and/or storing any materials and equipment in the correct area, identifying any waste and arranging for its disposal, and reporting any defects or damage to the materials and equipment used.
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with organisational policy and procedures for the laboratory preparations undertaken, and to report any problems with the activities, materials or equipment that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will work under a high level of supervision, whilst taking responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will provide a good understanding of their work, and will provide an informed approach to the preparation of culture media and solutions in a laboratory environment. The learner will understand the importance of doing this work efficiently and effectively, and will know what to consider when preparing and tidying up the work area before and after the preparation activities. The learner will also know how to deal with problems, and how to achieve their work objectives and targets, in adequate depth to provide a sound basis for carrying out the activities safely and correctly.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
176
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
177
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Prep
are
culture
med
ia a
nd
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
W
ear
the
appro
priat
e per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
when
han
dlin
g s
pec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of pro
tect
ive
cloth
ing a
nd e
quip
men
t, a
s ap
pro
priat
e fo
r th
e m
edia
/solu
tion b
eing h
andle
d:
–
labora
tory
coat
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
safe
ty g
lass
es
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
1.4
M
ainta
in s
tock
s of
med
ia,
dry
pow
der
and o
ther
re
agen
ts f
or
the
pre
par
atio
n o
f cu
lture
med
ia a
nd
solu
tions
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
178
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.5
Car
ry o
ut
all of
the
follo
win
g o
per
atio
ns
in t
he
pre
par
ation o
f cu
lture
med
ia/s
olu
tions:
–
store
dry
pow
der
med
ia a
nd o
ther
rea
gen
ts
corr
ectly
–
corr
ectly
reco
nst
itute
dry
pow
der
med
ia
–
fort
ify
med
ia w
ith a
ppro
priate
rea
gen
ts,
acco
rdin
g t
o form
ula
e
–
mai
nta
in,
set
up a
nd s
hut
dow
n m
edia
pre
par
ations
acc
ord
ing t
o S
OPs
and
man
ufa
cture
rs’ in
stru
ctio
ns
–
carr
y out
ster
ility
chec
ks o
n p
repar
ed c
ulture
m
edia
/solu
tions
–
carr
y out
qualit
y co
ntr
ol ch
ecks
on p
repare
d
culture
med
ia/s
olu
tions
1.6
M
ake
up c
ulture
med
ia/s
olu
tions
for
use
, ac
cord
ing
to form
ula
e
2
Prep
are
culture
med
ia a
nd
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
(co
ntinued
)
2.1
U
se e
quip
men
t acc
ord
ing t
o s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g
pro
cedure
s (S
OPs
) an
d m
anufa
cture
rs’ in
stru
ctio
ns
2.2
Ensu
re t
hat
pre
par
ed c
ulture
med
ia/s
olu
tions
are
st
erile
and fit for
purp
ose
2.3
Tak
e appro
priat
e act
ion w
hen
dea
ling w
ith m
edia
co
mponen
ts in a
ll of
the
follo
win
g s
ituat
ions:
–
sensi
tive
to lig
ht
–
hea
t la
bile
–
hea
t st
able
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
179
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.4
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion a
bout
pre
par
ed c
ulture
med
ia/s
olu
tions
to a
uth
orise
d
peo
ple
, in
acc
ord
ance
with d
epar
tmen
tal an
d
org
anis
atio
nal
pro
cedure
s
2.5
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e pre
par
ation w
ork
done,
and
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to p
repar
e cu
lture
med
ia a
nd
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
180
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
spec
imen
s/sa
mple
s
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
limits
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ority
and t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
min
imum
bat
ch s
ize/
volu
me
of cu
lture
m
edia
/solu
tions
required
for
the
inve
stig
atio
ns
bei
ng c
onduct
ed b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4
Know
how
to p
repar
e cu
lture
med
ia a
nd
solu
tions
for
labora
tory
use
(co
ntinued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
loca
tion for
each
typ
e of cu
lture
m
edia
/solu
tion t
hat
can
be
use
d b
y th
e la
bora
tory
4.2
D
escr
ibe
the
stora
ge
conditio
ns
for
the
various
reag
ents
and c
om
ponen
ts o
f cu
lture
m
edia
/solu
tions
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
stock
contr
ol an
d r
ota
tion o
f cu
lture
m
edia
/solu
tions
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
corr
ect
ster
ilisi
ng r
equirem
ents
of
the
diffe
rent
types
of
culture
med
ia/s
olu
tions
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
isks
invo
lved
with
med
ia p
repar
atio
ns
and p
ress
urise
d v
esse
ls
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
fact
ors
whic
h m
ight
adve
rsel
y affec
t th
e in
tegrity
of
the
culture
med
ia/s
olu
tion d
uring
stora
ge
or
tran
sit
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
181
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
risk
s an
d h
azar
ds
asso
ciate
d w
ith t
he
pre
par
ation o
f th
e cu
lture
med
ia/s
olu
tions,
and h
ow
th
ese
can b
e m
inim
ised
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
182
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
183
Unit 20: Following aseptic procedures in the laboratory environment
Unit reference number: T/601/2031
QCF level: 2
Credit value: 9
Guided learning hours: 51
Unit summary
This unit covers the skills and knowledge needed to prove the competences required to identify and follow aseptic or clean room protocols in the laboratory, in accordance with approved procedures and practices. Prior to undertaking the laboratory activity, the learner will be required to carry out all the necessary preparations within the scope of their responsibility. The learner will be required to work to the relevant standard operating procedures, legislation and organisational policy, and to follow Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) and/or Good Clinical Practice (GCP)/Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP).
The learner’s responsibilities will require them to comply with any policies of their organisation in respect of preparing for work and working in aseptic or clean rooms and clean work areas. The learner will be required to report any problems with clean room procedures that they cannot personally resolve, or that are outside their permitted authority, to the relevant people. The learner will be expected to work to verbal/written instructions and standard operating procedures, with a high level of supervision, taking personal responsibility for their own actions and for the quality and accuracy of the work that they carry out. On completion of laboratory activities, the learner will be expected to discard personal protective equipment in the correct location, and in accordance with established policies and procedures.
The learner’s underpinning knowledge will be sufficient to provide a sound basis for their work, and will enable them to adopt an informed approach to preparing for and working in aseptic or clean rooms. The learner will have an understanding of the attribute and behaviours required for clean room working, in adequate depth to provide a sound background for carrying out the laboratory activities to the required specification.
The learner will understand the safety precautions required when carrying out laboratory activities. The learner will be required to demonstrate safe working practices throughout, and will understand the responsibility they owe to themselves and others in the workplace.
Assessment requirements
Assessment requirements are set down in Annexe D: Assessment strategy.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
184
Assessment methodology
This unit is assessed in the workplace. Learners can enter the types of evidence they are presenting for assessment and the submission date against each assessment criterion. Alternatively, centre documentation should be used to record this information.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
185
Lear
nin
g ou
tcom
es a
nd a
sses
smen
t cr
iter
ia
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1
Follo
w a
septic
pro
cedure
s in
the
labora
tory
en
viro
nm
ent
1.1
Ensu
re t
hat
thei
r w
ork
is
carr
ied o
ut
in a
ccord
ance
w
ith s
tandar
d o
per
atin
g p
roce
dure
s
1.2
D
ress
in t
he
appro
pri
ate
per
sonal
pro
tect
ion
equip
men
t (P
PE)
required
for
the
clea
n r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a e
nvi
ronm
ent,
in a
ccord
ance
with
the
corr
ect
pro
cedure
1.3
U
se t
hre
e of th
e fo
llow
ing t
ypes
of per
sonal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t fo
r cl
ean r
oom
work
ing:
–
body
suit
–
face
mask
–
glo
ves
–
resp
irat
or
–
air
supply
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
186
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.4
Pr
ior
to e
nte
ring c
lean r
oom
, ca
rry
out
all
of th
e fo
llow
ing:
–
use
the
corr
ect
issu
e of
job inst
ruct
ions
and
spec
ific
atio
ns
–
follo
w r
isk
asse
ssm
ent
pro
cedure
s an
d C
OSH
H
regula
tions
–
ensu
re t
hat
they
are
appro
priat
ely
dre
ssed
and
unco
nta
min
ated
bef
ore
ente
ring t
he
are
a
–
carr
y out
thei
r act
ivitie
s in
lin
e w
ith
org
anis
atio
nal
pro
cedure
s
–
store
acc
ura
te r
ecord
s of th
eir
act
ivitie
s, in
acco
rdan
ce w
ith a
ppro
priate
pro
cedure
s
1.5
Car
ry o
ut
visu
al qual
ity
chec
ks o
n t
hei
r per
sonal
pro
tect
ion e
quip
men
t prior
to e
nte
ring t
he
work
ing
envi
ronm
ent
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
187
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
1.6
Sat
isfy
all
the
follo
win
g c
om
pan
y cl
ean r
oom
/cle
an
work
are
a r
equirem
ents
:
–
use
appro
priat
e cl
oth
ing/p
erso
nal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t (P
PE)
(such
as
suits,
gow
ns,
coat
s,
hoods,
hat
s, c
aps,
hel
met
s, o
ther
hea
dw
ear,
boots
, ove
rshoes
, oth
er form
s of
footw
ear,
sa
fety
goggle
s, v
isors
, glo
ves)
–
com
ply
with h
azar
d p
rote
ctio
n (
such
as
bre
athin
g a
ppar
atus,
glo
ves,
apro
n/s
mock
, oth
er
form
s of
PPE o
r cl
oth
ing r
equired
)
–
dea
l appro
priat
ely
with d
amaged
or
dirty
cl
oth
ing/P
PE (
such
as
report
ing d
amag
e,
repla
cem
ent,
saf
e re
mova
l and c
leanin
g o
r dis
posa
l, s
ubje
cted
to a
cid/h
aza
rdous
subst
ance
sp
ills,
dam
aged
/dirty
lab
ellin
g)
–
store
spec
ifie
d c
loth
ing/P
PE c
orr
ectly
when
not
in u
se
–
ensu
re t
he
pro
per
cl
eanin
g/l
aunder
ing/m
ainte
nan
ce o
f cl
oth
ing/P
PE
–
dis
pose
of
single
-use
clo
thin
g a
nd e
quip
men
t in
th
e co
rrec
t lo
cation
–
report
any
haz
ards
or
bre
ach
es o
f pro
toco
l
1.7
Fo
llow
the
corr
ect
pro
cedure
s fo
r en
tering a
nd
exitin
g t
he
clea
n r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
188
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2
Follo
w a
septic
pro
cedure
s in
the
labora
tory
en
viro
nm
ent
(continued
)
2.1
U
se p
erso
nal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t in
one
of th
e fo
llow
ing c
lean
room
envi
ronm
ents
:
–
hea
lth/d
isea
se s
cree
nin
g
–
bio
chem
ical
pro
cess
ing
–
bio
tech
nolo
gy
pro
cess
ing
–
dru
g d
evel
opm
ent
–
agro
-bio
tech
res
earc
h
–
oth
er (
ple
ase
spec
ify)
2.2
Fo
llow
ase
ptic
tech
niq
ues
in t
he
labora
tory
2.3
Id
entify
and follo
w p
roto
col m
ethods
and
pro
cedure
s th
at
satisf
y all
of
the
follo
win
g:
–
the
safe
ty o
f peo
ple
–
conta
inm
ent/
inte
grity
of th
e sp
ecim
en/p
roduct
–
conta
inm
ent/
inte
grity
of th
e cl
ean r
oom
/work
ar
ea
–
appro
priat
e in
dust
ry s
tandar
ds
and p
roto
cols
2.4
Rem
ove
per
sonal pro
tect
ion e
quip
men
t on
com
ple
tion o
f cl
ean r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a ac
tivi
ties
, an
d d
ispose
/sto
re in lin
e w
ith t
he
corr
ect
pro
cedure
2.5
Com
munic
ate
the
required
info
rmat
ion a
bout
the
work
done,
to a
uth
orise
d p
eople
, in
acc
ord
ance
w
ith d
epar
tmen
tal an
d o
rganis
ational
pro
cedure
s
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
189
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
2.6
Rec
ord
det
ails
of th
e w
ork
act
ivity,
and
com
munic
ate
the
det
ails
to t
he
appro
priat
e peo
ple
, usi
ng:
–
verb
al re
port
Plus
one
met
hod f
rom
the
follo
win
g:
–
writt
en o
r ty
ped
rep
ort
–
spec
ific
com
pan
y docu
men
tation
–
com
pute
r-bas
ed r
ecord
–
elec
tronic
mai
l
3
Know
how
to follo
w
asep
tic
pro
cedure
s in
the
labora
tory
envi
ronm
ent
3.1
D
escr
ibe
the
hea
lth a
nd s
afe
ty r
equirem
ents
of
the
area
in w
hic
h t
hey
are
carr
ying o
ut
the
labora
tory
ac
tivi
ties
3.2
D
escr
ibe
the
implic
atio
ns
of not
taki
ng a
ccount
of
legis
lation,
regula
tions,
sta
ndar
ds
and g
uid
elin
es
when
conduct
ing lab
ora
tory
act
ivitie
s
3.3
D
escr
ibe
the
princi
ple
s of G
ood L
abora
tory
Pra
ctic
e (G
LP)
and/o
r G
ood C
linic
al Pr
actice
(G
CP)
/Good
Man
ufa
cturing P
ract
ice
(GM
P) a
pplie
d in t
he
work
pla
ce
3.4
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of w
earing p
rote
ctiv
e cl
oth
ing,
glo
ves
and e
ye p
rote
ctio
n w
hen
handlin
g
mat
eria
ls (
such
as
bio
chem
ical su
bst
ance
s,
bio
logic
al p
athogen
s an
d/o
r an
tigen
s),
and t
he
equip
men
t use
d t
o c
onta
in a
nd p
roce
ss t
hem
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
190
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
3.5
D
escr
ibe
the
man
ufa
cture
d m
ate
rial
s an
d b
atch
pro
cess
tra
ckin
g a
nd r
ecord
s sy
stem
3.6
D
escr
ibe
the
types
of han
dlin
g a
nd s
ort
ing s
yste
m,
and t
he
pro
cedure
s use
d f
or
mate
rial
s under
goin
g
pro
cess
ing in t
he
labora
tory
fac
ilities
3.7
D
escr
ibe
the
import
ance
of
corr
ect
iden
tifica
tion,
and a
ny
uniq
ue
org
anis
atio
nal
or
labora
tory
num
ber
s
3.8
D
escr
ibe
the
org
anis
atio
nal
req
uirem
ents
for
mai
nta
inin
g t
he
secu
rity
of th
e w
ork
pla
ce
3.9
D
escr
ibe
the
lines
of
com
munic
atio
n a
nd
resp
onsi
bili
ties
in t
hei
r dep
art
men
t, a
nd t
hei
r lin
ks
with t
he
rest
of
the
org
anis
ation
3.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e lim
its
of th
eir
ow
n a
uth
ori
ty a
nd t
o
whom
they
should
rep
ort
if th
ey h
ave
pro
ble
ms
that
they
can
not
reso
lve
3.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e sp
ecific
safe
ty p
reca
utions
to b
e ta
ken
when
work
ing in a
cle
an r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a en
viro
nm
ent
3.1
2
Des
crib
e th
e co
rrec
t fitt
ing a
nd u
se o
f cl
oth
ing a
nd
per
sonal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t th
at m
ust
be
worn
in
a cl
ean r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a (
such
as
for
body,
han
ds,
eye
s, e
ars,
fee
t, m
outh
and fac
e)
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
191
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4
Know
how
to follo
w
asep
tic
pro
cedure
s in
the
labora
tory
envi
ronm
ent
(continued
)
4.1
D
escr
ibe
the
haz
ards
asso
ciat
ed w
ith w
ork
ing in a
cl
ean r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a,
with lab
ora
tory
eq
uip
men
t (s
uch
as
hea
t, r
adia
tion,
chem
ical
s,
stat
ic e
lect
rici
ty,
hig
h v
oltag
es,
trap
pin
g p
oin
ts o
n
equip
men
t)
4.2
Exp
lain
how
to p
ut
on c
lean
room
clo
thin
g a
nd
footw
ear
corr
ectly
4.3
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s fo
r en
tering a
nd e
xiting
the
clea
n r
oom
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a, a
nd t
he
auth
ority
nee
ded
to d
o s
o
4.4
D
escr
ibe
the
clas
sifica
tion o
f th
e re
leva
nt
clea
n
room
or
clea
n w
ork
are
a, a
nd h
ow
this
im
pac
ts
upon y
ou
4.5
D
escr
ibe
the
indust
ry s
tandar
ds/
clas
sifica
tions
for
clea
n r
oom
s an
d c
lean
work
are
as
4.6
D
escr
ibe
the
com
pan
y re
quirem
ents
for
cloth
ing
and p
erso
nal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t, a
nd t
he
reas
ons
why
such
clo
thin
g a
nd e
quip
men
t m
ust
be
use
d
4.7
D
escr
ibe
the
pro
cedure
s an
d m
ethods
for
mai
nta
inin
g iss
ued
clo
thin
g a
nd p
erso
nal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t
4.8
Exp
lain
how
to a
pply
pro
cedure
s fo
r dea
ling w
ith
dam
aged
or
dirty
clo
thin
g a
nd p
erso
nal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t
4.9
Exp
lain
how
to s
tore
clo
thin
g a
nd p
erso
nal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t co
rrec
tly
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
192
Learn
ing
ou
tco
mes
Ass
ess
men
t cr
iteri
a
Evid
en
ce
typ
e
Po
rtfo
lio
re
fere
nce
D
ate
4.1
0
Des
crib
e th
e la
under
ing/c
lean
ing/m
ainte
nan
ce
pro
cedure
s re
lating t
o t
he
issu
ed c
loth
ing a
nd
per
sonal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t
4.1
1
Des
crib
e th
e as
eptic
tech
niq
ues
that
are
applie
d
and u
sed in t
he
labora
tory
4.1
2
Exp
lain
how
to d
ispose
corr
ectly
of
single
-use
per
sonal
pro
tect
ive
equip
men
t
4.1
3
Des
crib
e th
e polic
y and p
roce
dure
s re
lating t
o
per
sonal
ite
ms
(such
as
body
lotions,
mak
eup,
jew
elle
ry,
conta
ct len
ses,
footw
ear,
ow
n c
loth
ing)
Lear
ner
nam
e:__________________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Lear
ner
sig
nat
ure
:_______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Ass
esso
r si
gnat
ure
:______________________________________
D
ate:
___________________________
Inte
rnal
ver
ifie
r si
gnatu
re:
________________________________
(i
f sa
mple
d)
Dat
e:___________________________
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
193
Further information
Our customer service numbers are:
BTEC and NVQ 0844 576 0026
GCSE 0844 576 0027
GCE 0844 576 0025
The Diploma 0844 576 0028
DiDA and other qualifications 0844 576 0031
Calls may be recorded for training purposes.
Useful publications
Related information and publications include:
Centre Handbook for Edexcel QCF NVQs and Competence-based Qualifications published annually
functional skills publications – specifications, tutor support materials and question papers
Regulatory Arrangements for the Qualification and Credit Framework (published by Ofqual, August 2008)
the current Edexcel publications catalogue and update catalogue.
Edexcel publications concerning the Quality Assurance System and the internal and standards verification of vocationally related programmes can be found on the Edexcel website.
NB: Some of our publications are priced. There is also a charge for postage and packing. Please check the cost when you order.
How to obtain National Occupational Standards
To obtain the National Occupational Standards for Laboratory Science please go to:
SEMTA www.semta.org.uk
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
194
Professional development and training
Edexcel supports UK and international customers with training related to NVQ and BTEC qualifications. This support is available through a choice of training options offered in our published training directory or through customised training at your centre.
The support we offer focuses on a range of issues including:
planning for the delivery of a new programme
planning for assessment and grading
developing effective assignments
building your team and teamwork skills
developing student-centred learning and teaching approaches
building functional skills into your programme
building effective and efficient quality assurance systems.
The national programme of training we offer can be viewed on our website (www.edexcel.com/training). You can request customised training through the website or by contacting one of our advisers in the Training from Edexcel team via Customer Services to discuss your training needs.
The training we provide:
is active
is designed to be supportive and thought provoking
builds on best practice
may be suitable for those seeking evidence for their continuing professional development.
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
195
Annex
e A
: Pro
gres
sion
pat
hw
ays
The
Edex
cel qual
ific
atio
n f
ram
ewor
k fo
r th
e Sc
ience
sec
tor
Level
Gen
era
l q
uali
fica
tio
ns
Dip
lom
as
BTE
C v
oca
tio
nall
y-
rela
ted
q
uali
fica
tio
ns
BTEC
sp
eci
ali
st
qu
alifi
cati
on
/
pro
fess
ion
al
NV
Q/
com
pete
nce
8
7
6
5
4
BTEC H
igher
Nat
ional
s in
Applie
d S
cien
ces
N
VQ
Labora
tory
and
Ass
oci
ated
Tec
hnic
al
Act
ivitie
s
3
GCE S
cien
ces:
Chem
istr
y; P
hys
ics;
Bio
logy;
Psy
cholo
gy
Edex
cel BTEC L
evel
3
Cer
tifica
te,
Subsi
dia
ry
Dip
lom
a, D
iplo
ma
and
Ext
ended
Dip
lom
a in
Applie
d S
cien
ce
(incl
udin
g F
ore
nsi
c Sci
ence
and M
edic
al
Sci
ence
path
way
s)
N
VQ
Labora
tory
and
Ass
oci
ated
Tec
hnic
al
Act
ivitie
s
NVQ
Labora
tory
Sci
ence
2
GCSE S
cien
ce;
Additio
nal
Sci
ence
; Ast
ronom
y; C
hem
istr
y;
Phys
ics;
Bio
logy;
Ps
ycholo
gy
Edex
cel BTEC L
evel
2
Cer
tifica
te,
Ext
ended
Cer
tifica
te a
nd
Dip
lom
a in
Applie
d
Sci
ence
N
VQ
Labora
tory
and
Ass
oci
ated
Tec
hnic
al
Act
ivitie
s
NVQ
Labora
tory
Sci
ence
N027133 –
Spec
ific
atio
n –
Lev
el 2
NVQ
Dip
lom
a in
Lab
ora
tory
Sci
ence
–
July
2011 ©
Pea
rson E
duca
tion L
imited
2011
196
Level
Gen
era
l q
uali
fica
tio
ns
Dip
lom
as
BTE
C v
oca
tio
nall
y-
rela
ted
q
uali
fica
tio
ns
BTEC
sp
eci
ali
st
qu
alifi
cati
on
/
pro
fess
ion
al
NV
Q/
com
pete
nce
1
En
try
Foundat
ion L
earn
ing
Tie
r (A
pplie
d S
cien
ce)
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
197
Annexe B: Quality assurance
Key principles of quality assurance
A centre delivering Edexcel qualifications must be an Edexcel recognised centre and must have approval for qualifications that it is offering.
The centre agrees, as part of gaining recognition, to abide by specific terms and conditions relating to the effective delivery and quality assurance of assessment. The centre must abide by these conditions throughout the period of delivery.
Edexcel makes available to approved centres a range of materials and opportunities to exemplify the processes required for effective assessment and provide examples of effective standards. Approved centres must use the guidance on assessment to ensure that staff who are delivering Edexcel qualifications are applying consistent standards.
An approved centre must follow agreed protocols for: standardisation of assessors; planning, monitoring and recording of assessment processes; internal verification and recording of internal verification processes and dealing with special circumstances, appeals and malpractice.
Quality assurance processes
The approach to quality assured assessment is made through a partnership between a recognised centre and Edexcel. Edexcel is committed to ensuring that it follows best practice and employs appropriate technology to support quality assurance processes where practicable. The specific arrangements for working with centres will vary. Edexcel seeks to ensure that the quality-assurance processes it uses do not inflict undue bureaucratic processes on centres, and works to support them in providing robust quality-assurance processes.
The learning outcomes and assessment criteria in each unit within this specification set out the standard to be achieved by each learner in order to gain each qualification. Edexcel operates a quality-assurance process, designed to ensure that these standards are maintained by all assessors and verifiers.
For the purposes of quality assurance, all individual qualifications and units are considered as a whole. Centres offering these qualifications must be committed to ensuring the quality of the units and qualifications they offer, through effective standardisation of assessors and internal verification of assessor decisions. Centre quality assurance and assessment processes are monitored by Edexcel.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
198
The Edexcel quality-assurance processes will involve:
gaining centre recognition and qualification approval if a centre is not currently approved to offer Edexcel qualifications
annual visits to centres by Edexcel for quality review and development of overarching processes and quality standards. Quality review and development visits will be conducted by an Edexcel quality development reviewer
annual visits by occupationally competent and qualified Edexcel Standards Verifiers for sampling of internal verification and assessor decisions for the occupational sector
the provision of support, advice and guidance towards the achievement of National Occupational Standards.
Centres are required to declare their commitment to ensuring quality and appropriate opportunities for learners that lead to valid and accurate assessment outcomes. In addition, centres will commit to undertaking defined training and online standardisation activities.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
199
Annexe C: Centre certification and registration
Edexcel Standards Verifiers will provide support, advice and guidance to centres to achieve Direct Claims Status (DCS). Edexcel will maintain the integrity of Edexcel QCF NVQs through ensuring that the awarding of these qualifications is secure. Where there are quality issues identified in the delivery of programmes, Edexcel will exercise the right to:
direct centres to take action
limit or suspend certification
suspend registration.
The approach of Edexcel in such circumstances is to work with the centre to overcome the problems identified. If additional training is required, Edexcel will aim to secure the appropriate expertise to provide this.
What are the access arrangements and special considerations for the qualifications in this specification?
Centres are required to recruit learners to Edexcel qualifications with integrity.
Appropriate steps should be taken to assess each applicant’s potential and a professional judgement should be made about their ability to successfully complete the programme of study and achieve the qualification. This assessment will need to take account of the support available to the learner within the centre during their programme of study and any specific support that might be necessary to allow the learner to access the assessment for the qualification. Centres should consult Edexcel’s policy on learners with particular requirements.
Edexcel’s policy on access arrangements and special considerations for Edexcel qualifications aims to enhance access to the qualifications for learners with disabilities and other difficulties (as defined by the 1995 Disability Discrimination Act and the amendments to the Act) without compromising the assessment of skills, knowledge, understanding or competence. Please refer to Access Arrangements and Special Considerations for BTEC and Edexcel NVQ Qualifications for further details. www.edexcel.com.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
200
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
201
Annexe D: Assessment requirements/strategy
Introduction
Semta, the Sector Skills Council for the Science Engineering Manufacturing Technologies
Sector, has produced this QCF Unit Assessment Strategy to:
assist Assessors, Internal Verifiers and External Verifiers
encourage and promote consistent assessment of NVQ units
promote cost effective assessment plans
This document also provides definitions for:
the qualifications and experience required for Assessors and Verifiers
the assessment environment and notes on simulation/replication.
access to units
and requirements relating to:
carrying out assessments
performance evidence
assessing knowledge and understanding
The importance and value in which employers and learners place on undertaking NVQ units will provide a key measure of [Semta’s] success with this unit assessment strategy. Another key success factor will be [Semta’s] partnership with the relevant Awarding Organisations.
Assessor Requirements to Demonstrate Effective Assessment Practice
Assessment must be carried out by competent Assessors that as a minimum must hold the QCF Level 3 Award in Assessing Competence in the Work Environment. Current and operational Assessors that hold units D32 and/or D33 or A1 and/or A2 as appropriate to the assessment being carried out, will not be required to achieve the QCF Level 3 Award as they are still appropriate for the assessment requirements set out in this Unit Assessment Strategy. However, they will be expected to regularly review their skills, knowledge and understanding and where applicable undertake continuing professional development to ensure that they are carrying out workplace assessment to the most up to date National Occupational Standards (NOS)
Assessor Technical Requirements
Assessors must be able to demonstrate that they have verifiable, relevant and sufficient technical competence to evaluate and judge performance and knowledge evidence requirements as set out in the relevant QCF unit learning outcomes and associated assessment criteria.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
202
This will be demonstrated either by holding a relevant technical qualification or by proven industrial experience of the technical areas to be assessed. The assessor’s competence must, at the very least, be at the same level as that required of the learner(s) in the units being assessed.
Assessors must also be:
Fully conversant with the Awarding Organisation’s assessment recording documentation used for the QCF NVQ units against which the assessments and verification are to be carried out, other relevant documentation and system and procedures to support the QA process.
Verifier Requirements (internal and external)
Internal quality assurance (Internal Verification) must be carried out by competent Verifiers that as a minimum must hold the QCF Level 4 Award in the Internal Quality Assurance of Assessment Processes and Practices. Current and operational Internal Verifiers that hold internal verification units V1 or D34 will not be required to achieve the QCF Level 4 Award as they are still appropriate for the verification requirements set out in this Unit Assessment Strategy. Verifiers must be familiar with, and preferably hold, either the nationally recognised Assessor units D32 and/or D33 or A1 and/or A2 or the QCF Level 3 Award in Assessing Competence in the Work Environment.
External quality assurance (External Verification) must be carried out by competent External Verifiers that as a minimum must hold the QCF Level 4 Award in the External Quality Assurance of Assessment Processes and Practices. Current and operational External Verifiers that hold external verification units V2 or D35 will not be required to achieve the QCF Level 4 Award as they are still appropriate for the verification requirements set out in this Unit Assessment Strategy. Verifiers must be familiar with, and preferably hold, either the nationally recognised Assessor units D32 and/or D33 or A1 and/or A2 or the QCF Level 3 Award in Assessing Competence in the Work Environment.
External and Internal Verifiers will be expected to regularly review their skills, knowledge and understanding and where applicable undertake continuing professional development to ensure that they are carrying out workplace Quality Assurance (verification) of Assessment Processes and Practices to the most up to date National Occupational Standards (NOS).
Verifiers, both Internal and External, will also be expected to be fully conversant with the terminology used in the QCF NVQ units against which the assessments and verification are to be carried out, the appropriate Regulatory Body’s systems and procedures and the relevant Awarding Organisation’s documentation, systems and procedures within which the assessment and verification is taking place.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
203
Specific technical requirements for internal and external verifiers
Internal and external verifiers of this qualification must be able to demonstrate that have verifiable, sufficient and relevant industrial experience, and must have a working knowledge of the processes, techniques and procedures that are used in the relevant sector/occupation.
The tables on the following page show the recommended levels of technical competence for assessors, internal verifiers, and external verifiers.
Technical Requirements for Assessors and Verifiers
Position Prime activity requirements
Support activity requirements
Technical requirements (see notes)
Assessor Assessment Skills
IV Systems Technical competence in the areas covered by the QCF units being assessed
Internal Verifier Verification Skills Assessment Knowledge
Technical understanding of the areas covered by the qualifications
External Verifier Verification skills Assessment Understanding
Technical awareness of the areas covered by the qualifications
Notes
1 Technical competence is defined here as a combination of practical skills, knowledge, and the ability to apply both of these, in familiar and new situations, within a real working environment.
2 Technical understanding is defined here as having a good understanding of the technical activities being assessed, together with knowledge of relevant Health & Safety implications and requirements of the assessments.
3 Technical awareness is defined here as a general overview of the subject area, sufficient to ensure that assessment and portfolio evidence are reliable, and that relevant Health and Safety requirements have been complied with.
4 The competence required by the assessor, internal verifier and external verifier, in the occupational area being assessed, is likely to exist at three levels as indicated by the shaded zones in the following table.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
204
Technical Competence
Required by:
An ability to discuss the general principles of the competences being assessed
An ability to describe the practical aspects of the competence being assessed
An ability to demonstrate the practical competences being assessed
Assessor
Internal Verifier
External Verifier
Assessment Environment
The evidence put forward for this unit can only be regarded valid, reliable, sufficient and authentic if achieved and obtained in the working environment and be clearly attributable to the learner. However, in certain circumstances, simulation/replication of work activities may be acceptable.
The use of high quality, realistic simulations, which impose pressures which are consistent with workplace expectations, should only be used in relation to the assessment of the following:-
o rare or dangerous occurrences, such as those associated with health, safety and the environment issues, emergency scenarios and rare operations at work;
o the response to faults and problems for which no opportunity has presented for the use of naturally occurring workplace evidence of learners competence;
o aspects of working relationships and communications for which no opportunity has presented for the use of naturally occurring workplace evidence of learner’s competence.
Simulations will require prior approval from the specific Awarding Organisation and should be designed in relation to the following parameters: -
o the environment in which simulations take place must be designed to match the characteristics of the working environment;
o simulations which are designed to assess competence in dealing with emergencies, accidents and incidents must be verified as complying with relevant health, safety and environmental legislation by a competent health and safety/environmental control officer before being used;
o simulated activities should place learners under the same pressures of time, access to resources and access to information as would be expected if the activity was real;
o simulated activities should require learners to demonstrate their competence using real plant and equipment;
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
205
o simulated activities which require interaction with colleagues and contacts should require the learner to use the communication media that would be expected at the workplace;
o for health and safety reason simulations need not involve the use of genuine substances/materials. Any simulations which require the learner to handle or otherwise deal with materials substances/should ensure that the substitute take the same form as in the workplace
Simulations/replications should be designed in relation to a realistic work environment, having an acceptable level of appropriate equipment and operating to Good Laboratory Practice (GLP)/Good Control Laboratory Practice (GCLP) and/or Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP)/Current Good Manufacturing Practice (CGMP) standards. It may involve the use of inert substitutes for dangerous compounds or microbiological materials.
Access to Assessment
There are no entry qualifications or age limits required by learners to undertake the NVQ units unless this is a legal requirement of the process or the environment. Assessment is open to any learner who has the potential to achieve the assessment criteria set out in the units.
Aids or appliances, which are designed to alleviate disability, may be used during assessment, providing they do not compromise the standard required.
Carrying Out Assessment
The NVQ units were specifically developed to cover a wide range of activities. The evidence produced for the units will, therefore, depend on the learners choice of “bulleted items” listed in the unit assessment criteria.
Where the assessment criteria gives a choice of bulleted items (for example ‘any three from five’), assessors should note that learners do not need to provide evidence of the other items to complete the unit (in this example, two) items, particularly where these additional items may relate to other activities or methods that are not part of the learners normal workplace activity or area of expertise.
Minimum Performance Evidence Requirements
Performance evidence must be the main form of evidence gathered. In order to demonstrate consistent, competent performance for a unit, performance evidence must be provided, and must be sufficient to show that the performance requirements of the unit have been carried out to the prescribed standards. It is possible that some of the scope items may be covered more than once. The assessor and learner need to devise an assessment plan to ensure that performance evidence is sufficient to cover all the specified scope items and which maximises the opportunities to gather evidence. Where applicable, performance evidence maybe used for more than one unit.
The most effective way of assessing competence, especially for the performance statements in relation to scope items, is through direct
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
206
observation of the learner. Assessors must make sure that the evidence provided reflects the learner’s competence and not just the achievement of a training programme.
Evidence that has been produced from team activities, for example, cleaning equipment, is only valid when it clearly relates to the learners specific and individual contribution to the activity, and not to the general outcome(s).
Each example of performance evidence will often contain features that apply to more than one unit, and can be used as evidence in any unit where appropriate.
Performance evidence must be a combination of:
outputs of the learner’s work, such as items that have been processed or worked on, and documents produced as part of a work activity
together with:
evidence of the way the learner carried out the activities such as witness testimonies, assessor observations or authenticated learner reports, records or photographs of the work/activity carried out, etc.
Competent performance is more than just carrying out a series of individual set tasks. Many of the units contain statements that require the learner to provide evidence that proves they are capable of combining the various features and techniques. Where this is the case, separate fragments of evidence would not provide this combination of features and techniques and will not, therefore, be acceptable as demonstrating competent performance.
If there is any doubt as to what constitutes valid, authentic and reliable evidence, the internal and/or external verifier should be consulted.
Assessing knowledge and understanding
Knowledge and understanding are key components of competent performance, but it is unlikely that performance evidence alone will provide enough evidence in this area. Where the learner’s knowledge and understanding (and the handling of contingency situations) is not apparent from performance evidence, it must be assessed by other means and be supported by suitable evidence.
Knowledge and understanding can be demonstrated in a number of different ways. Semta expects oral questioning and practical demonstrations to be used, as these are considered the most appropriate for these units. Assessors should ask enough questions to make sure that the learner has an appropriate level of knowledge and understanding, as required by the unit.
Awarding Organisations may choose other methods, which must be supported by a suitable rationale
Evidence of knowledge and understanding will not be required for those bulleted items in the assessment criteria that have not been selected by the learner.
The achievement of the specific knowledge and understanding requirements of the units cannot simply be inferred by the results of tests or assignments
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
207
from other units, qualifications or training programmes. Where evidence is submitted from these sources, the assessor must, as with any assessment, make sure the evidence is valid, reliable, authentic, directly attributable to the learner, and meets the full knowledge and understanding requirements of the unit.
Where oral questioning is used the assessor must retain a record of the questions asked, together with the learner’s answers.
Awarding Organisations may choose other methods, which must be supported by a suitable rationale.
Witness testimony
Where observation is used to obtain performance evidence, this must be carried out against the unit assessment criteria. Best practice would require that such observation is carried out by a qualified Assessor. If this is not practicable, then alternative sources of evidence may be used.
For example, the observation may be carried out against the assessment criteria by someone else that is in close contact with the learner. This could be a team leader, supervisor, mentor or line manager who may be regarded as a suitable witness to the learner’s competency. However, the witness must be technically competent in the process or skills that they are providing testimony for, to at least the same level of expertise as that required of the learner. It will be the responsibility of the assessor to make sure that any witness testimonies accepted as evidence of the learner’s competency are reliable, auditable and technically valid.
Quality Control of Assessment
General
There are two major points where an Awarding Organisation interacts with the Centre in relation to the External Quality Control of Assessment and these are:
Approval - when a Centre take on new qualifications/units, the Awarding Organisation, normally through an External Verifier (EV) ensures that the Centre is suitably equipped and prepared to deliver the new units/qualification
Monitoring - throughout the ongoing delivery of the qualification/units the Awarding Organisation, through EV monitoring and other mechanisms must maintain the quality and consistency of assessment of the units/qualification
Approval
In granting Approval, the Awarding Organisation, normally through its External Verifiers (EV) must ensure that the prospective Centre:
Meets the requirements of the Qualification Regulator
Has sufficient and appropriate physical and staff resources
Meets relevant health and safety and/or equality and access requirements
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
208
Has a robust plan for the delivery of the qualification/units
The Awarding Organisation may visit the Centre to view evidence or may undertake this via other means.
The Awarding Organisation must have a clear rationale for the method(s) deployed
Monitoring
The Awarding Organisation, through EV monitoring and other mechanisms must ensure:
that a strategy is developed and deployed for the ongoing Awarding Organisation monitoring of the Centre. This strategy must be based on an active risk assessment of the Centre. In particular the strategy must identify the learner’s, assessors and Internal Verifier sampling strategy to be deployed and the rationale behind this
that the Centre’s internal quality assurance processes are effective in learner’s assessment
that sanctions are applied to a Centre where necessary and that corrective actions are taken by the Centre and monitored by the Awarding Organisation/EV
that reviews of Awarding Organisation’s external auditing arrangements are undertaken
Awarding Organisations are required to provide to SEMTA, on request, details of the strategies, rationales and reviews detailed above.
Notes:
a) It is recognised that some Awarding Bodies provide supplementary guidance and documentation to centres to support the quality of assessment and verification practice of N/SVQs.
N027133 – Specification – Level 2 NVQ Diploma in Laboratory Science – July 2011 © Pearson Education Limited 2011
209
Annexe E: Additional requirement for qualifications that use the term ‘NVQ’ in a QCF qualification title
Please go to www.ofqual.gov.uk to access the document ‘Operating rules for using the term ‘NVQ’ in a QCF qualification title’.
5162db190711S:\LT\PD\NVQ COMPETENCE\N027133 DIPL2 IN LABORATORY SCIENCE (QCF).DOC.1-216/1
Publications Code N027133 June 2011 For more information on Edexcel and BTEC qualifications please visit our website: www.edexcel.com Pearson Education Limited. Registered in England and Wales No. 872828 Registered Office: Edinburgh Gate, Harlow, Essex CM20 2JE. VAT Reg No GB 278 537121